(Go: >> BACK << -|- >> HOME <<)

Skip to main content

Full text of "Wintringham, The Coming World War"

See other formats


P 
A 
ru 
m 
T 
~ 
m 
4 


ttle Piila tiii tila 


prigi sits EAEE T nE aa ariris cet! = ETE EE aiin 
Ren wit PRANTE AHHH E A AIRT ti eyes beeia fe betabenacadetade ipah atii; putts inereriy Bitien tt OA ELLA bok ec bie wld ts Hutia tt ` wie 235 
SIE MST ESTE EART Ea mi t 


ett DAE EE OA CCK ER SFAOMSA GIT TTL 
a z o -ATN N 


= 

— aS gA 
~ ARUN 
<P> 


= Í i] 
TEMETETT TEA] | 
NEE E | 
x VN ; N 7 $| | 
> yi 1 | 
N > 
GN 
~ | 
LAN 


TINET 
TO ~ `% 


<a 


© Ais 
` JAN 
z X z pE 4 A | | 
lar XY ~~ en te Y A n NH | 
WARS ` ~ 7S = S 4 Ae | 
è f ` > Fa WA Ft k] 
EN A A AN LEA JTT] i á á A E NIA 
2 ‘ie ~~ = = 5 [è 
5 iG N > A 7 ja 
4 i ` =e -n Z (fa 
a = A ———_—_— — — CA A ay fiya 
ip JN j Z VIM 
€; 7 f) te Sit 
A | i si| 

i | THE 
w | į e 
Mi aji A i Hh = Ve) 
S'i We 
> È. Vibe! 
i A = a -s = 
= > a a ES S 
pas at 5+ ( = — Cath ie see = 

m —— Í 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


THE 
COMING WORLD WAR 


by 
T. H. WINTRINGHAM 
A 


LONDON 
WISHART BOOKS LIMITED 
1935 


PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN 
BY WESTERN PRINTING SERVICES LTD., BRISTOL 


IF we are to maintain our position as a first-rate power, 
we must, with our Indian Empire and large colonies, 
be prepared for attacks and wars, somewhere or other 
CONTINUALLY. And the true economy will be to be 
always ready.—Queen Victoria, 1879. 


THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED =. 
TO THOSE WHO ARE 
READY 


we ag A Fp 
á. iG: 


CONTENTS 
PREFACE 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 
War From THE AIR 
YENGHIZ KHAN’s COUNTRY 
GOERING’s BOMBERS . 
Br PREPARED! 

THEY SPEAK PEACE . 
Wars Enp—Anp How 
LABOUR AND WAR 
War’s Roots 

GENERAL CRISIS 
REVOLUTION . 


APPENDIX 
Maps . 


135 
155 
179 
200 
216 


239 
256 


PREFACE 


Macuines make war. These machines are made by 
men and women, handled by men, and directed 
against men, often against women and children. The 
‘usefulness’ of machines in war depends on the 
direction given to them by commanders, and the 
efficiency with which they are served, as well as on 
their own powers. Men—working machines or hid- 
ing from them, enduring their assault—win wars. 
But in all modern warfare the machines do the fight- 
ing and determine what sort of war it shall be: men 
are their servants and their targets. This book is an 
attempt to suggest the way in which the rapid 
development of modern machinery—and of tech- 
nique as a whole, including chemistry—will affect the 
second world war that is generally recognized to be 
close at hand. It is also an attempt to suggest the way 
in which the men who make and handle these 
machines can and will end war. 

If and when this war comes, it will be different 
from all other wars. Much of the difference will be 
due to the development of the aeroplane. In 1914 
this machine was in its infancy; only one aeroplane 
existed that could lift and drop a torpedo; a wind of 
moderate strength made flying almost impossible; 
aeroplane armament consisted of revolvers and car- 
bines and grenades with fuses that had to be lit before 
the ‘bomb’ was dropped. A machine in its first 


9 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


stages of development, such as this, cannot have a 
decisive influence on warfare; in the slower-moving 
days of the Napoleonic wars the first steamships were 
evolved, but they had no influence whatever on these 
wars (the first naval vessel with an auxiliary steam- 
engine was launched in 1823). The aeroplane had 
not become more than a lusty infant in 1918; it was 
able, as lusty infants are, to cause much trouble and 
`- disturbance, but unable to alter the shape of warfare. 
The aeroplane is now of full military age. 

The next world war, wherever it starts, will spread 
to Europe; the effect of war from the air on thickly- 
populated industrial areas therefore takes first place 
in any attempt to give a picture of what is likely 
to happen. But it is possible and indeed likely that 
the first phase of this war will include, or consist of, 
a campaign in Manchuria, Mongolia, and Siberia. 
The uses of machines vary with climate and geo- 
graphy; here the modern developments of technique 
need to be considered in relation to the nature and 
size of the battlefields and of the contending forces, 
very different from those of Europe. 

The preparations that are being made for the new 
sort of warfare, both in Europe and in many parts 
of the world, show that those whose duty it is to plan 
the next world war consider it close at hand. In 
these preparations the technical aspects—the develop- 
ment of machines, the training of men to serve them, 
and the building of defences against them—are not 
more important than the political aspects, the 
spreading of propaganda and shaping of methods by 
which the governments can get their peoples to go to 
10 


PREFACE 


war, and can continue to rule during this new sort 
of warfare. One form of propaganda is of particular 
importance, because it is the essential thing, now and 
here in Britain, in the preparations for a new sort of 
war. It is the main thing necessary to secure the 
support of those who make this sort of war possible. 
This is the propaganda that expresses ideas and 
feelings favourable to peace, but expresses them in 
forms and moulds them into association with organi- 
zations and persons that permit of these ideas and 
feelings being used, when the time comes, as ammuni- 
tion in another ‘war to end war.’ 

The two preceding paragraphs outline the sub- 
jects discussed in the first half of this book. It will be 
a pity if the reader who gets as far as the second 
chapter, or even the fifth, then gives up under the 
impression that it is mainly written, as many books 
and articles seem now to be written, to show that the 
second world war will be more than unpleasant and 
should be prevented. The attempt in this book is to 
describe a war, real, solid, and rapidly approaching 
us; to describe some of the new features of this war 
and of the preparations for it; but only in order that 
this background can be used for a serious discussion 
of the measures proposed for preventing this war 
occurring, or for ending it when it has begun. 

It is possible that such a discussion may be more 
useful than some of the current chatter about war in 
the abstract, war as part of human nature or in rela- 
tion to the Christian ethic, war as an expression of 
this or that psychological formula or national charac- 
teristic. Out of steel and aluminium, petrol, explo- 

II 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


sives, poisons, lathes, blueprints, a real war is being 
shaped. The forces shaping it are equally real: 
markets, rates of profits, monopolies, competition, 
poverty ‘caused by plenty,’ tariffs, class power. It 
may be of some use to deal with these realities as they 
seem likely to affect the inception of the next world 
war, the possibility of preventing it, the continuance 
of such a war, and the ending of it. 

That this war is near at hand admits of no doubt. 
It is not necessary to pile up opinions or facts to show 
this : the reader has only to look at his daily paper and 
think of what he sees there.* As specimens, one 
opinion and one fact will do. The fact first: the 
active squadrons of the Royal Air Force already ex- 
ceed in number the active squadrons of the Royal 
Flying Corps in January 1918. Each modern 
squadron is of course, also, far more powerful than 
its war-time counterpart. And this force is being 
increased more rapidly, in relation to its present size, 
than the Royal Navy was increased before 1914. 

As a specimen opinion, let us take that of the most 
experienced politician in Europe: 


* The author of this book, on the other hand, had to stop reading 
the daily press during the last few weeks of its preparation. Each 
day’s news contained quotations he wanted to use, more effective 
than those embodied in the book. But it has proved impossible to 
escape knowledge of the German announcement of conscription, an 
announcement freeing part of the new German army, already 
formed and already, with its reserves, larger than the 36 divisions 
announced, from the difficulties of secrecy. Or the French Premier’s 
reply: ‘It is impossible to separate the moral preparation of the 
nation from its military preparation. Let us take an example from 
the moral preparation which has been carried out beyond the 
Rhine.’ (Daily Telegraph, March 21, 1935.) Or the British govern- 
ment’s greatly increased estimates for the army, navy, and air force. 
12 


PREFACE 


‘The atmosphere of the world—East and West— 
is charged with international suspicions, rivalries and 
fears that have always hitherto ended in war. 
Nations are arming for war. Every nation through- 
out the world—almost without exception—is in- 
creasing its armaments. ... There is no confidence 
in any quarter that peace can be long preserved.’* 


Those who see this war as close at hand, almost 
certain within the next few years, sometimes speak 
of it as inevitable. But at the same time they work 
to prevent it. That paradox has to be disentangled 
if the argument of this book is to be understood. 
Otherwise all efforts to show what the war will be 
like, and how near it is, will lead mainly in the end 
to the purchase of a few gas-masks, the excavation of 
a few dug-outs in suburban back-gardens, and a 
slight increase in the liability to blind panic among 
those who cannot secure these modern amenities— 
and among those who realize their inefficiency. 

Luckily, no miracle is involved, such as the ‘pre- 
vention of the inevitable.’ The laws of political 
economy, which in the long run govern questions of 
war and peace, instruct us as definitely as the laws 
of Louis XIV: ‘commit no miracles.’f It is not 
necessary that the impossible should happen, that the 


_* D. Lloyd George, War Memoirs, Vol. III, London, 1934, page 


viii. 
t Louis XIV, according to one version of a story that has col- 
lateral descendants, asked one of his bishops why and how a political 
prisoner had escaped from the bishop’s dungeons. The bishop 
replied : ‘It can only have been by a miracle.’ Louis ordered that he 
should post on his gate this notice forbidding miracles : 
De par le Roy, défense à Dieu 
D’opérer miracles en ceste lieu. 


13 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


two thousand million human beings on this planet 
should simultaneously change their natures. It would 
indeed be a miracle on a very convincing scale if 
even a majority of them began to disregard the 
stresses and compulsions of ordinary existence, the 
durable relationships in which they struggle to live 
and to expand their lives, began to suffer a change of 
heart and to follow the precepts, rather than the 
examples, of such exponents of peace as John D. 
Rockefeller or the founder of the Nobel peace prizes, 
and of the Nobel fortune—which was made by the 
sale of explosives. The honest longing of millionaires, 
war profiteers among them, for a peaceful world 
consisting, say, of kindly and charitable Presbyterians, 
is no more hypocritical—and no less—than any 
similar ache in the hearts of a Lansbury or a Gandhi. 
It is as sincere as any illusion held by any of the 
bewildered millions to whom events happen without 
clear cause—without any reason at all except the 
wickedness of the neighbours they are endeavouring 
to love. But it is an illusion: this change will not 
- happen. Not in this way can we hope to see resolved 
the tragic strain of ‘war is inevitable—war must be 
prevented.’ , 

For so long as the economic relations by which 
we live are those of capitalism, we are ruled by 
‘the natural laws of capitalist production . . . 
working with iron necessity towards inevitable 
results.’ * In the years since that phrase was written 
the iron has been smelted into steel and the steel has 
been given a cutting edge. This necessity’s ‘abhorred 

* Karl Marx, preface to second German edition of Capital. 

14 


PREFACE 


shears’ have hacked away many lives and hopes in 
one world war; they now close down to tear away 
more lives, and all the painfully woven insecure 
beauty and comfort that remains for those in some 
way privileged in life, making for those not privileged 
an existence less tolerable still. How can we break 
those shears, that necessity? 

The aim of this book is primarily to discuss how 
we can do that, basing this discussion on facts of 
to-day. Among these facts are not only the technical 
relations of men, the mechanical powers and instru- 
ments they have at their disposal, but also their 
social relations: the arrangements between indivi- 
duals, groups, classes by which men get their living. 
From these relations war springs. Men will change 
these relations when they see that it is from them, by 
war, that they get their deaths. 


March 1935. T. H. W. 


Ss oe 
ae 


MDD. Bi 0ks Misansct Si sg meg el a ee 88” 


ahh sd ahh bone 


CaM Natt asia ct fe. 


be, es ey = eee - 


Atl tn nate clit” del 


ae ala 


eS cee. a, 


CHAPTER i. 


a 
C ois 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


Macuines make war. This has only recently 
become true; is now only true to a limited extent. 
Yet it is so far true that the influence of machines 
altered, during 1914—18, almost every aspect of war; 
combat, tactics, strategy by 1918 had become very 
different from what they were in 1914; since 1918 
the changes have gone even farther. 

Although this influence is a recent development, 
corresponding in its growth to the past hundred 
years’ mechanization of production, transport, and 
travel, and only reaching full stature during the past 
twenty years, machines have had some influence on 
warfare for a much longer period. In the ancient 
world, four hundred years before Christ, aspects of 
machine development began that were of importance 
in warfare. 

The primitive Greek, Roman and Carthaginian 
machines, made of wood, bulky and heavy, were 
difficult to use with the field armies because they 
could not easily be moved. But they became of first 
importance in sieges, and in the defence of fortified 
lines such as the Roman walls in north Britain. 
` . About two hundred years before Christ, catapults 
and baliste had achieved a range of eight hundred 
= Dionysius, an Alexandrian, invented the poly- 


17 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


bolos, a machine throwing a number of arrows one 
_ after the othér. ‘On the lines first roughly indicated 
by these two developments all subsequent sia in 


oe : war. machines has occurred. 


= Men do not go to war for the sake of fighting, but ; 
‘in order to win victory. They want as much as they 
can get of the latter, as little as possible of the former. 
Therefore, if they can, they constantly employ 
weapons with a longer and longer range, and try to 
hit their enemies with these weapons’ projectiles 
—while themselves remaining so far away that their 
enemies cannot hit back. At the same time a second 
process goes on. Long-range weapons are hard to 
aim, therefore bold troops will advance through 
their fire. To prevent such an assault getting un- 
pleasantly close, men devise machines capable of 
rapid fire, killing as large a number as possible of the 
assailants in the few minutes available. . 

Wooden machinery, powered by twisted ropes in 
tension, or flexible wood in torsion, is not suitable 
for action over great distances or at great speeds. 
The 800 yards’ range mentioned by Agesistratus was 
probably exceptional—the range of some classical 
‘Big Bertha.’ But smaller ‘engines,’ despite their 
clumsiness, became effective weapons in the hands of 
great commanders such as Alexander of Macedon, 
who may have been the first to employ them as true 
field artillery. And when created by the skill of 
master engineers and the wealth of great cities, they 
could, for a period, dominate siege warfare. Plutarch 
writes of the siege of Syracuse: ‘all the rest of the 
Syracusans were no more than the body in the 
18 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


batteries of Archimedes, whilst he was the informing 
soul. All other weapons lay idle and unemployed, his 
were the only offensive and defensive arms of the city.’ 

Men had—for a short period—become servants 
and targets of the machines, even as far back in 
history as that. 

Major-General J. C. F. Fuller, from whose work 
on ‘the projectile cycle’ in classical warfare these 
examples have been taken, comments on them: ‘the 
point to note here is, and we do not see it again 
clearly until after the Industrial Revolution, that 
directly projectile weapons become superior to shock 
weapons, more and more is the power to wage war 
economically influenced by the civilian inventor, by 
science and by industry, in place of by the soldier 
and his professional tactics. The result of this is... 
that generalship is apt to fall behind inventiveness ; 
secondly, that fighting becomes more and more 
dependent upon invention and industry, until to 
attack these sources of military power is even more 
important than attacking the enemy’s armies.’* 

In this way the ‘constant tactical factor,’ as Major- 
General Fuller calls it, leads through the growth of 
‘technique to a change in war greater than a mere 
change in the weapons used. Aspects of this change, 
in modern conditions, begin to be noted soon after 
the Franco-Prussian war,f but other aspects are, of 


* Major-General J. F. C. ages C.B., C.B.E., D.S.O., The 
Dragon’s Teeth, London, 1932, p. 23 
+ Engels in his ‘Anti-Dihring’ (Bory Eugen Diihring’s Revolution in 
Science, London, 1935) quotes (on p. 195) a captain of the German 
general staff who said in 1876 that ‘the basis of warfare is primarily 
the general economic life of the peoples.’ 
19 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


course, occurring all through the centuries after the 
collapse of ancient civilization. 

Changes in weapons (first mainly in weapons as 
tools, then in weapons as machines), consequent 
changes in warfare, have played a large part in the 
shifting of power from one social class to another. 
Major-General Fuller describes the effect of the 
introduction of gunpowder to Europe (it was first 
invented in China): 


“Gunpowder . . . first restricted and then elimi- 
nated the feudal order, it abolished private wars, 
consolidated kingdoms, policed them, and with the 
merchant led to the emergence of another order and 
form of civilization—the Modern Age.’* 


_ The process by which this occurred was described 
more fully by Friedrich Engels in 1878: 


‘At the beginning of the fourteenth century, gun- 
powder came from the Arabs to Western Europe, 
and, as every school-child knows, completely revo- 
lutionized methods of warfare. The introduction of 
gunpowder and firearms, however, was . . . a step 
forward in industry, an economic advance. Industry 
remains industry, whether it is applied to the produc- 
tion or the destruction of things. And the introduc- 
tion of firearms had a revolutionizing effect not only 
on war itself, but also on the political relationships 
of domination and subjection. The provision of 
powder and firearms required industry and money, 
and both of these were in the hands of the burghers 
of the towns. From the outset, therefore, firearms 
were the weapons of the towns, and of tac rising 


o Major- General Fuller, The Dragon’s Teeth, p. 250. 
20 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


monarchy drawing its support from the towns, 
against the feudal nobility. The stone walls of the 
noblemen’s castles, hitherto unapproachable, fell 
before the cannon of the burghers, and the bullets 
of the burghers’ arquebuses pierced the armour of 
the knights. With the armour-clad cavalry of the 
feudal lords, the feudal lords’ supremacy was also 
broken; with the development of the bourgeoisie, 
infantry and guns became more and more the 
decisive types of weapons. ’* 


Technique develops ; warfare changes ; class power 
is shifted. This process did not end when ‘the ruins 
Cromwell knocked about a bit’ became useless in 
war. It is a process that can reach its full develop- 
ment to-day or to-morrow—when industry rather 
than ‘the soldier and his professional tactics’ 
becomes clearly the most important thing. in war- 
fare—and ‘industry’ means more and more, with 
modern technique, the skill, education, numbers of 
an industrial working class. 

Stages in this process of change can be seen in 
every struggle of the revolutionary bourgeoisie to 
establish its power against feudalism and royalty. In 
the American War of Independence the flint-lock 
muskets of King George’s mercenaries were opposed 
to the rifled weapons of the American settlers. ‘These 
settlers, being hunters of wild animals, had learnt 
how to aim and hit; King George’s troops were 
drilled to reserve their volleys until they could see 
every detail of their opponents’ uniforms. The 
Americans fought from the woods as sharpshooters ; 

* Friedrich Engels, Anti-Dihring, p. 190. 

21 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


bourgeois individualism triumphed, and bourgeois 
democracy. 

The French Revolution met the old order of 
Europe in battle first at Valmy, in 1792. It was a 
critical point for the revolution, before Carnot (who 
began his military career with a famous ‘Essai sur 
les Machines en Général,’ 1786) had been able to 
create the new revolutionary armies. Valmy was not 
really a battle: it is correctly described by Hilaire 
Belloc as a cannonade. The technical weapon pro- 
duced by industry, artillery, here was a principal 
factor in deciding the progress of a social change, 
the revolution. 

Later this revolution was subjugated by, and yet 
summed up in, an expert gunner, Napoleon. He 
began his career as a lieutenant of artillery in the 
same year as Carnot published his ‘Essai.’ In his first 
engagement of importance, that at Toulon, he intro- 
duced new methods of attack by artillery on fortified 
positions and on a fleet. And his typical method of 
struggle for power, and of government in crisis, had 
as its basis not the training of a special guard of any 
sort (the royal method) but a ‘whiff of grapeshot.’ 

In his preparations for battle—as the non-military 
reader may have noticed from Tolstoy’s description 
of Borodino in War and Peace—Napoleon first dictated 
the position of his artillery and their objectives. The 
field-gun, though primitive, had become a dominant 
weapon. It continued to become more and more 
important until the development of modern rifles and 
entrenchments (1904) to some extent countered its 
power. 

22 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


While industry was producing more and more 
powerful artillery, it was improving the tools of war- 
fare as well as the machines*: breech-loading rifles, 
then repeating rifles, then the machine-gun. This, as 
its name implies, is a tool or weapon that has 
become a machine. For the ancient balista the field- 
gun, for the catapult the howitzer, for the polybolos 
the machine-gun. The full development of these 
weapons during the first World War brought the 
siege of Germany almost to the same stage as the 
siege of Syracuse ; the soldier became ‘the body in the 
batteries.’ 

The industrial technique that came to full expres- 
sion in these weapons is that of coal, steel, steam, 
blasting charges, the turret lathe—mid-nineteenth- 
century materials and forces. During the twentieth 
century a new technique (based of course on this 
older one) came into being with extraordinary speed : 
steel alloys, aluminium, electricity (the magneto), 
and petrol began to dominate in transport. When 
the petrol-engine had developed, the aeroplane, the 
tank, and the cross-country lorry came into being. 
These three machines had scarcely time, by 1918, to 
show their full powers. 

For the campaign of 1919 the plans of the British 
Ministry of Munitions included 10,000 fighting tanks, 
10,000 caterpillar lorries,t and special fleets of aero- 


* A tool consists of few parts, is usuall abend by hand by a 
single individual, and the movements of the parts are simple; 
machine consists of many parts, is usually operated by power, fevers, 
etc., by a number of men, and the movements of some of its parts 
are complicated, often repetitive. 

t Winston Churchill, The World Crisis, 1916-1918, Part II, p. 485. 


23 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


planes for long-distanced bombing. ‘All that hap- 
pened,’ writes Winston Churchill, * ‘in the four years 
of the Great War was only a prelude to what was 
preparing for the fifth year. The campaign of the 
year 1919 would have witnessed an immense acces- 
sion to the power of destruction . . . thousands of 
aeroplanes would have shattered their cities . . . 
(using) poison gases of incredible Mangy But 
this campaign was not fought. 

. When the second world war comes, the new 
technique based on petrol, aerodynamics, and 
chemistry will be fully applied to warfare for the 
first time. 

The scale of warfare made possible by the almost 
illimitable productive capacity of the modern world 
has led to a position in which the fighting forces are 
dependent not on a few arsenals but on all the indus- 
try of a country at war. Shells alone for a modern 
battle may need transport capacity equal to that of 
100,000 big lorries.t That this growing dependence 
of armies on industry means a very big change is 
admitted by the theoreticians of war. Thus Captain 
Liddell Hart, in his History of the Great War, draws a 
distinction between ‘the nation in arms’ (as in past 
wars) and ‘the nation at war’ (as it will be in the 
future). 

The distinction amounts to this: in the first case 
the whole able-bodied male population is trained, 
and as far as possible made available, for service in 


* Winston Churchill, The World Crisis: The Aftermath, p. 453. 

+ Naturally it is impossible and unnecessary to provide such a 
number of lorries; each vehicle makes more than o one journey from 
railhead to dump or battery. . 


24 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


the army, which is the’ war-making instrument. In 
the second case all the activities, social and economic, 
of the population are governed by the need to make 
available its military strength, which is expressed 
more fully in millions of shells, in artillery, transport, 
tanks, aeroplanes and machine-guns, than in mil- 
lions of riflemen. __ 

This change makes necessary a different sort of 
preparation for war. Governments need to think 
first of the discipline and productive efficiency of 
the working classes, not of the armies. In the 
Napoleonic or Crimean wars the civilian had to be 
willing to pay rather higher taxes; now he must be 
willing to work directly for the war—while he is the 
target for the most effective weapons used in the 
war. i E 

For the application of technique based on petrol 
and the new metallurgy may alter land warfare out 
ofrecognition, but its principal effect is to bring about 
a war from theair against the enemy’s chief centres 
of military strength : the factory cities. Following the 
‘constant tactical factor’ to. its logical conclusion, the 
ultimate weapon would be an aeroplane operated 
by wireless from half across the world, capable of 
bombing or gassing the factories and working-class 
populations that supply the enemies’ armies. Before 
this ultimate conclusion becomes their end, the work- 
ing-class populations will have a part to play in the 
matter. 7 3 : 

In the next chapter we will suggest some of the 
probable aspects of this war from the air. Before 
that, it is necessary to summarize the relationship 


25 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


between technique and warfare, stated above, as part 
of a wider relationship, between technique and 
society. 

It will, perhaps, have been noticed that quotations 
from Major-General Fuller—one of the leading 
theoreticians of the British Army—and from Fried- 
rich Engels, the collaborator of Karl Marx, coincide 
remarkably on the social effect of the introduction 
of gunpowder. Major-General Fuller is no Marxist ; 
he is in all probability a supporter of Sir Oswald 
Mosley, since in the first issue of the Fascist Quarterly 
(January 1935) he contributes the necessary anti- 
Semitism. But working at the facts of his profession 
and studying the relation between technique and 
war, he develops ideas contained in a clearer form 
in Marxism, the science that explains the relations 
between technique, and the productive relations in 
which men get their living, and society as a whole, 
including all its ‘superstructure’ of arts and sciences. 

From economics, from exact descriptions of life 
by every sort of witness, from factory inspectors’ re- 
ports and the widest generalizations of history, Marx 
built up a theory which shows productive technique, 
the way men get their living, and its progress to be 
the dominant factor—not the sole cause, in a one- 
way street of cause and effect, but the root, the pri- 
mary thing—in society, law, art, government, the 
way men live. The fact that warfare demands new 
weapons, machines; that these machines alter war- 
fare ; that this alteration then helps in the destruction 
of old ruling classes and the rise of new ones—this is 
only an illustration, a sub-section, of the general pro- 
26 7 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


cess of the development of society that Marx first ——7 
brought to consciousness and clarity. : 
There are English readers who have never been 
further west than Marylebone, yet ‘come from 
Missouri’ : they demand to be shown. For them, the 
value of a theory of society lies not in its ability to 
explain events and show their relations, but in its 
ability to predict events or form the basis of predic- 
tion. It is worth while giving, for their sake, some of 
the more superficial ‘credentials’ of Marxism. 
Marxism is a method of thought and action used 
by those who understand the world in order to 
change it. It is a combination of theory and prac- 
tice. In Britain these two aspects of human life have 
no equality in prestige : for so many years the British 
people were the pioneers in changing empirically, 
by ‘rule of thumb,’ the whole shape and nature of 
the life of the world’s population, that they have 
grown accustomed to neglecting social theory—the 
rational, scientific study of the laws that govern and 
link events. (Britain’s rival power, Germany, having 
learnt modern industry and finance and life late and 
at second hand, became for a period just the oppo- 
site, a nation of theoretical bent.) It is no part of 
this book’s purpose to do very much of the spade- 
work needed—greatly needed—to break through | 
what Lenin called the ‘English aversion to theory.’ 
But we can attempt to give some examples of how 
Marxist theory ‘works.’ To show the practical value 
of this theoretical system may help some readers to 
understand that it is an essential part of the struggle 
to prevent the relapse of the world into barbarism. 


27 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


We will take examples from Engels and Lenin that 
touch on the main subject of this book: war. Eco- 
nomics, history, political science, have seen a wide 
development of controversy on Marxism. We need 
not intervene here except to note that the average 
man’s summing up of the economic controversy is: 
Marx is always said to be out of date, but his pre- 
dictions as to the breakdown of capitalism as an 
economic system—from its own structure and own 
forces—are being proved correct every day. ‘There 
must be something more in Marx than will be 
allowed by those experts in economics who. prove 
him wrong yearly, but cannot prevent things going 
as he said they would. . 

This feeling of the ordinary man may be steenpili- 
ened if we can show that Engels and Lenin knew 
more about the war of 1914-18, before it happened, 
than did the great soldiers and war ministers of 
Europe. : 

Engels wrote in- 1801: ; 


‘The Socialists in all countries are for peace. If, 
nevertheless, war comes, then one thing is certain. 
This war, where fifteen and twenty million armed 
men would slaughter one another and lay waste to 
Europe as never before, this war must either bring 
about the immediate victory of Socialism or so 
shatter the old order of things from top to bottom, 
and leave behind such a heap of ruins, that the old 
capitalist society will become more impossible than 
ever before, and the social revolution, though it 
might be set back for ten or fifteen years, would, 
however, in this case also have to conquer, and 
28 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


in so much the more speedy and thorough 
fashion. ’* | 


In this quotation we note the accurate idea of the 
scale of the future world war, the casualties, the 
devastation. The general staffs on both sides, 
believing in a short war, were about as wrong as 
Engels was right. More important, the generals 
never foresaw ‘the immediate victory of Socialism’ 
which will seem to history the outstanding result of 
the war (immediate, and yet needing a struggle of 
decades, a victory not yet fully achieved—the hardest 
yard-stick of all to make is that for the fourth dimen- 
sion! We can see what is happening and what will 
happen soon. How soon, no one can tell accurately.) 

Earlier, Engels—this civilian in the Manchester 
cotton trade, whose works are never mentioned by 
the military theorists—had given an almost ludi- 
crously correct picture of what the war between 
France and Germany would be like: 


‘If things turn out as we would like it, and this is 
very probable, then it will be a war of position with 
varying success on the French frontier, a war of 
attack leading to the capture of the Polish fortresses 
on the Russian frontier, and a revolution in Peters- 
burg, which will at once make the gentlemen who 
are conducting the war see everything in an entirely 
different light. One thing is certain: there will be 
no more quick decisions and triumphal marches to 
Berlin or Paris.” (Letter to W. Liebknecht, Feb- 
ruary 23, 1888.) | on 


* Socialism in Germany, 1891, quoted in the Labour Monthly, 
August 1931. 
29 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Later he predicted that the Germans would go 
through Belgium, disregarding the Treaty of Neu- 
trality as ‘a scrap of paper’—Engels’s words. 

There are no signs in any military theory or 
history that any general or soldier thought the war 
in the West would become one of positions. But it 
did. And the Polish fortresses fell. And the revolution 
occurred as Engels had predicted. 

Lord Kitchener is said to have realized the likeli- 
hood of a long and devastating war. He was an 
exception in this among the generals of Europe. But 
Kitchener knew less than Lenin about the weapons 
that would prove to be dominant in this war. 

Lenin wrote in 1906, after the Moscow insurrec- 
tion, to the effect that technical changes were taking 
place in warfare which those organizing insurrection 
should note. The Russo-Japanese war, he pointed 
out, had ‘produced the hand-grenade; automatic 
firearms have been placed on the market.’* In these 
dozen words Lenin picks out, to illustrate his argu- 
ment, two weapons most neglected by the generals 
of 1914, but of decisive importance during the war. 

Lloyd George, in his War Memoirs, has described 
how Lord Kitchener laid it down, in 1915, that four 
machine-guns per battalion would be quite enough. 
He was only a few hundred per cent. wrong, by 1918.f 

* ‘Lessons of Moscow Insurrection,’ Selections from Lenin, Vol. II, 
_ p. 205, Martin Lawrence, London, 1927. 

t Kitchener’s viewpoint on machine-guns was not worse than that 
of the French general staff. In their regulations of October 28 and 
December 2, 1913, the French general staff laid down, detail by 
detail, the methods to be used by ‘large units’ in battle. The machine- 


gun is never mentioned! See, for a concise and cruel analysis of 
these regulations, Le Plan 17 by André Morizet, Paris, 1919. 


30 


TECHNIQUE AND BATTLE 


Similarly the hand-grenade, that Lenin noted in 
1906 as important among modern weapons, was not 
supplied to the British Army until a year of warfare 
had gone by. In the first trench battles the British 
infantry used plum-and-apple jam tins, filled with 
cordite by themselves and fitted with make-shift 
fuses. 

Engels and Lenin were able to see further into the 
fog of war than those trained in the use of the blinkers 
of generalship. This was because Marxism, as a 
science, is based on a knowledge of the relations 
between technique, industrial progress, and the forms 
and policies of social life. Changes in technique— 
mastery. of explosives in small handy containers for 
use in mines and quarries, development of automatic 
repetitive machinery—can be seen by Marxists to 
have obvious parallels and consequences in war: the 
hand-grenade, the machine-gun. Just as the larger 
changes in productive technique can be seen to pro- 
duce, condition, limit, govern the growth of classes 
and the forms of their clash in politics. 


31 


CHAPTER II 
WAR FROM THE AIR 


War from the air is not to be confused with war in 
the air. From 1914 to 1918 the aeroplane was used 
principally as a special sort of scout, ‘spotting’ for 
guns, carrying out reconnaissance behind the enemy 
lines.. The machines doing this work were limited to 
a few dozen miles of territory on each side of fixed 
trench lines. They could be and were attacked by 
fighters, and an elaborate organization of attack and 
defence was built up—a war in the air. 

But the aeroplane in the next war will not mainly 
be a special sort of scout; it will mainly be a special 
sort of artillery. .It will be a weapon capable of 
partially destroying cities and depots, and hampering 
ports and railways, within several hundred miles of 
the fighting-line. 

The German ‘Gothas’ were used against London 
and Paris in this way, in the last years of the war; so 
was an independent section of the Royal Air Force 
which bombed Rhine towns. But these forces had 
not reached full development by the Armistice. 

The weight-carrying capacity and range of the 
modern bomber makes it roughly a dozen times as 
efficient a weapon as the average machine used in 
1918. It can carry four times the load three times as 
far. It can also unload its cargo far more accurately. 


32 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


It is possible that in a colonial area such as Man- 
churia, for several reasons, the dominance of the 
air-weapon will only appear after some months of 
warfare. The distances are so enormous, the targets 
(towns, depots, ports) so small in size and restricted 
in number that it may be possible for defending 
‘fighters’ on each side to intercept a number of 
bombers. In the more thickly populated and more 
highly organized countries of Europe the immense 
power of the air-weapon will appear at once. Here 
there are many targets to choose from; it is impos- 
sible to guard them all; the destruction of the 
bridges, or the power-stations, or the main railway 
stations, or the government centres, or the food 
markets and warehouses of a modern city would 
cause so much disorganization that the city would 
be unable to play its full part in the war. 

Another reason why this weapon may not be 
dominant immediately in country such as Manchuria 
and Siberia is the difficulty of operating aircraft 
when snow is falling and when snow is melting. 
There are weeks and months when ’planes can only 
be flown from specially prepared landing-grounds. © 
And these landing-grounds will be the first targets on 
each side. But even here, after a few months of war- 
fare, railways, roads and ports may be more danger- 
ous than front-line trenches. Railways, probably, 
will only work at night. Troops on the road will 
move in the dark, or move in very small parties. 

In Europe, where swiftly moving mechanized „e. 
forces will be prominent for the first time, the targets 
for aircraft at the ‘front’ may be too elusive for the 


c 33 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


pilots to trouble themselves about. Why try to bomb 
tanks when you can bomb the depots from which 
they are supplied, and the factories that make and 
repair them? 

The most effective way of bombing cities will be 
to gas selected areas, ‘bottle-necks’ for transport 
or productive and administrative centres, and at 
the same time to scatter incendiary bombs, with a 
smaller proportion of high explosives, over a much 
larger number of targets. 

The theory has been put forward that ‘London 
could be wiped out in a night’ by the use of poison 
gas. This is not true. Armentières, with a civilian 
population of over 10,000, was enclosed in a ‘box- 
barrage’ of mustard-gas shells on July 28, 1918. 
This prevented civilians, who had no masks, from 
escaping. The town was soaked with mustard gas 
for two days. According to the Official History of the 
War (Medical Services),* the deaths numbered only 
12 per cent. of the population. 

It 1s quite clear that the aim of the politicians who 
talk of ‘London wiped out in a night’ is to scare up 

“panic support for a stronger Air Force. But apart 
from their aim, these scares are baseless. Every gas 
or liquid, or poisonous dust-smoke, has its own 
physical laws which it must obey. It can only rise, 
fall, spread outwards from the points of release in 
accordance with these laws. No substance of any of 
these types exists that will spread over and into houses 
for a long distance from the point of release. To 
damp the streets of London several thousand tons of 

* London, 1924, Vol. IT, p. 294. 

34 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


rain are needed. To deposit on each square inch of 
London a drop of liquid so small that it is only just 
visible would need over 300 tons of the liquid for 
inner London, which is 115 square miles in extent. 
‘Greater London’ is 700 square miles. No gas or 
mixture of gases can destroy all life in such an area in 
a month, even if all the air forces in the world are 
spreading it. 

But London will be starving, more or less rapidly, 
within a month if an air force of any size operates 
against it continuously. Transport will almost cease. 
Bridges and railway junctions will be wrecked with 
high explosive, strategic areas (such as the railway 
yards and crossings between King’s Cross and Chalk 
Farm, at Clapham Junction, at Willesden Junction, 
and also the Canning Town bridges) will be soaked 
with poison gas and unapproachable without special 
clothing and masks. The aircraft factories in the 
suburbs will be burnt or bombed. The failure or 
destruction of gas, electricity and water services will 
make the city practically uninhabitable. And in 
every town from Southampton to Glasgow night or 
day can bring the raiders and the terror. Suspense, 
waiting, fear—then the appalling horror of the attack. 

Fires, lit by incendiary bombs, will destroy large 
areas. These bombs can now be made of only four 
pounds weight; they generate heat enough to burn 
through an inch of steel; they cannot be quenched 
with water.* The ordinary fire-fighting organization 


* A factory making the metallic powders that are mixed to form 
thermite, and other incendiary substances, suitable for bombs, exists 
near an English city. To find it, you must turn off a side road down 
a lane that has, apparently, no name. The company’s own name 


35 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


will be useless against such weapons; its equipment 
is insufficient; the number of trained men is so 
restricted by motives of economy that the Labour 
majority on the London County Council—to give an 
example—cannot allow its firemen an eight-hour 
day. An explosion occurred just after Christmas 1934 
in a refrigerating plant near Smithfield market; the 
fumes spread, as poison gas will spread, across two 
or three streets; firemen with gas-masks were sum- 
moned from every brigade in London, even from as 
far away as Woolwich; but only eighteen men 
equipped with suitable masks were found to be avail- 
able. Fire equipment of this sort could not cope with 
the results of a raid by a single flight of modern 
bombers, carrying high explosive to break gas pipes, 
etc., thermite bombs to start fires, and mustard gas 
to protect these fires from ‘interference.’ Big fires, 
spreading to a frontage of whole streets, and the 
lingering wind-carried gas will cause casualties so 
horrible that the minds of those not injured will be 
strained to breaking-point. A planless rush out of 
London, and out of other big cities, will begin. 

The military correspondent of the Daily Telegraph, 


is the X Y Company, but outside their factory this name is not 
posted up; instead there is a board with the words: The Z Works. 
The name Z does not occur on the firm’s notepaper or in the tele- 
phone directory. Inside the factory the machinery is so completely 
automatic that few skilled workers are needed; the rest are young 
girls who know very little about the meaning of their work. Machines 
are grinding to powder metals so inflammable that the grinding 
cannot be done in air; a special atmosphere, largely consisting of 
nitrogen, is supplied to the working chambers. Automatic tests of 
this artificial atmosphere are made continually; if it is faulty, the 
testing apparatus switches off the entire factory’s electricity supply at 
once. 


36 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


Captain Liddell Hart, revealed in its issue of Novem- 
ber 7, 1933, that since 1925 the War Office had been=™ 
considering the provision of bomb-proof and gas- 
proof shelters, distribution of gas-masks to the civil 
population, training in their use, special training for 
fire brigades, measures for dealing with an interrup- 
tion of supplies of water, light, heat, power. The 
War Office is presumably still studying these ques- 
tions: it is even possible that before the next war 
their studies may get as far as the making of a few 
shelters and the issue of a few masks. 

Other bodies are also studying these questions. 
The Women’s Legion has asked for 4,000 women 
volunteers to receive training in emergency first-aid 
work, in the event of gas attacks. Lady Londonderry, 
wife of the Secretary of State for Air, is president of 
this legion; Lady Hailsham, wife of the Secretary of 
State for War, is one of her principal assistants. 
These ladies are necessarily well-informed, and it is 
possible, though not likely, that the training given 
under their patronage will be adequate—as training. 
As a practical measure to deal with the dangers 
foreseen, it is at least inadequate. 

The military correspondent of the Daily Telegraph 
is in continual touch with Government departments. 
He continued his article: 


"It has been suggested that in the event of severe 
air attacks 40 per cent. of London’s seven million 
population would leave the city in the first forty- 
eight hours, and 8o per cent. within the week. 

‘Such an estimate may be exaggerated, but it 1s 
nevertheless essential to consider ways of controlling 


37 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


any mass evacuation and of feeding and housing the 
refugees.” (Daily Telegraph, November 7, 1933.) 

‘Essential to consider’: this is very official lang- 
uage. Masks have been considered for ten years; 
shelters have been considered for ten yeats. Do many 
exist? Do any plans exist for dealing with the 
refugees? And would they be of the slightest use? _ 

For this looks like an insoluble problem: food, 
water, milk and even the provision of sufficient graves 
or quicklime or the organizing of cremation for 
several hundred thousand dead. An army of a 
million men needs trained and organized supply ser- 
vices numbering perhaps 50,000 men. How many 
thousand, untrained and unorganized, would be 
needed to feed the four million people who can be 
expected to leave London—according to a more con- 
servative estimate than that mentioned by Captain 
Liddell Hart—in the first fortnight of bombing? 
Even the roads would be insufficient for the purpose : 
of trained men 60,000 can be moved by a single road, 
at the rate of fifteen miles per day (on foot). The 
roads to the north and north-west of London would 
be hopeless if something over a quarter of a million 
people on foot were added to a heavier motor traffic 
than that which already, in ‘rush hours,’ congests 
them considerably. 

This, then, is the probable fate of London in a 
war from the air at the present moment. And, as we 
shall see in a later chapter, such a war is possible at 
any time. Paris would also suffer the same destruc- 
tion in a war with Germany or Britain, before 
General Goering’s new air force, or Mr. Baldwin’s, 
38 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


was destroyed. It is hard to reckon the probable 
extent of the casualties, but if the process is allowed to 
go to its limit, it seems possible that 25 per cent. of 
the populations of London, Paris and Berlin, if all 
three are involved, will be killed—say five or six 
million people in all. In this estimate the most diffi- 
cult figure to reckon is that for epidemic diseases 
among the civilian population. 

It should be remembered that this casualty list is 
only a small one as compared with the number killed 
throughout the world, in the last war, by wounds and 
disease. 

Typhus and enteric seem probable. The ‘order of 
merit” among creators of casualties may well be: 
disease, exposure, gas, hunger, fire, high explosive. 
Apart from immediate deaths from these causes there 
will be many who will die or go blind years after- 
wards. Five of the cases admitted to St. Dunstan’s 
during twelve months in 1933-34 were men blinded 
by gas—their blindness was not complete till nearly 
twenty years after the gassing. (Daily Telegraph, 
August 4, 1934). In this form of warfare there may 
be, for the first time in the history of the world, a 
large percentage of mental casualties—men and 
women who go mad. This is by no means certain, 
since human beings seemed, during the last war, 
capable of remaining relatively sane through almost 
anything. But ‘shell-shock,’ it is clear, will be 
common. The troops who suffered in the last war 
to the point of mental exhaustion had periods of 
rest when they were out of range of the guns. No one 
will be out of range of the bombers. 

39 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Those who endure will be liable to later break- 
down. The Ex-Servicemen’s Welfare Society, ac- 
cording to Sir R. Tyrwhitt, still cares for 6,000 
mental cases due to the last war in hospital ; there are 
also 32,000 cases of neurasthenia.* Many of these 
only developed fully when the strain of war had 
ended. | 

War is hell, and always has been; but even Dante 
never conceived the torments that can be let loose on 
the living now, at any moment, from the sky. Dante 
believed the sky to be populated with angels; a war 
film taught us, some time ago, to call the sky’s more 
recent inhabitants ‘Hell’s Angels.’ They will live 
up to that name. 

But it must not be thought that this new and 
efficient hell on earth is certain to lead directly to 
surrender and to peace. The town of Hull suffered a 
little from Zeppelin bombing early in the war, and 
on clear nights many hundreds used to trek out of 

- Hull to sleep—if they could sleep—ain the fields. 
But there was no noticeable feeling for peace engen- 
dered; the feelings roused were turned by adequate 
propaganda into hate for the ‘baby-killers.’ Mr. 
Bernard Shaw has said in a broadcast speech (later 
reprinted as a pamphlet, ‘Are We Heading for 
War?’ and published by the Labour Party) : ‘What 
will London do when it finds itself approached by a 
crowd of aeroplanes, capable of destroying it in half 
an hour? London will surrender. White flags and: 


= * Sir R. Tyrwhitt also said: “There are hospitals now in this 
country which the public never see. They contain mutilated men, 
their smashed faces hidden by masks. They are waiting to die!’ 


40 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


wireless messages: “Don’t drop your bombs: we 
give in,” will fill the air. But our own air squadrons 
will have already started to make the enemies’ 
capitals surrender. From Paris to Moscow, from 
Stockholm to Rome, the white flags will go up in 
every city.’ This gallant old man on the flying 
trapeze of paradox forgets that there is no single city, 
London, that can do such a thing. King and court, 
judges and police, generals and staffs, cabinets and 
civil services exist. Millionaires own the papers 
through which London becomes aware of what is 
happening. These rulers will ‘give in’ before a bomb 
is dropped? They have not the courage. Mr. Shaw 
was not educated at an English public school. 

These rulers will not say, ‘We give in.’ They are 
more likely to say: ‘Fight to the last man’—mean- ` 
while, as a matter of national necessity, removing ~ 
their offices to Belfast or to Inverness. 

On the question of bombing civilians there is no 
practical difference in policy between the Labour 
party and the other parties. A pacifist Secretary of 
State in the first Labour government was responsible 
for the ‘pacification’ of frontier tribes from the air. 
Lord Thomson, Secretary of State for Air in the 
second Labour government, said that in the next 
war ‘the way to win will be by the ruthless bombing 
of localities which in many cases will be densely 
populated.’ It is this ruthless bombing that will dis- 
tinguish, and set apart from all other battles in world 
history, the first phases at least of the second World 
War. | 

In a war of this sort, what part can the armies 


4I 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


play? They will be the ‘moppers-up.’ Raiding far 
into enemy country in mechanized brigades, they 
will have the duty of occupying the wrecked cities 
and enforcing dictated peace terms on their in- 
habitants, if either side succeeds completely in war 
from the air. It takes a lot of bombing to ‘knock a 
city right out.’ Even the jerry-built suburbs of 
Shanghai, bombed by the Japanese, stood a con- 
siderable amount of knocking about, from machines 
untroubled by any resistance. The Times stated on 
February 2, 1932, that ‘the bombing of the city has 
been going on since January 28. This bombing has 
claimed countless victims in Chapei, which is a 
human ant-hill . . . it is quite evident that the 
destruction of the entire city is intended.’ But this 
bombing, by machines numbering between 150 and 
200, went on with short intervals for a whole month, 
without the resistance of the Chinese in Chapei being 
broken. Their resistance was only ended when the 
Chinese government secured, by diplomatic means, 
the withdrawal of its own 19th Army, which had 
fought without the government’s sanction. 

When London, Paris and Berlin are treated in the 
same way by air forces stronger in numbers and much 
better equipped (but hampered perhaps just a little 
by the various forms of anti-aircraft defences) they 
will also remain capable of resistance, or more 
properly of defiance, for a considerable period. It 
will be the armies’ duty to put an end to this defiance 
—if they can beat the opposing armies. 

In Manchuria and Siberia, where cities scarcely 
matter, the armies may possibly provide the principal 


42 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


targets for the bombers. The ordinary infantry 
soldier, armed. with a rifle, will usually be unlucky 
—as most infantrymen on the Western front were in 
1918. The Pope has said, in an address to the 
Fascist National Infantryman’s Association: ‘We 
should, as you well-beloved sons are aware, be and 
remain far distant from all the science of warfare, 
but we cannot fail to see clearly that the infantry is 
the real body of the army.’ This ‘real body’ in the 
next world war will be cannon-fodder for His Holi- 
ness’s canonization—not much more. To the 
machine-gunners will fall the task of holding the 
positions won in battle-zones perhaps thirty miles 
wide. To the tanks and armoured cars will fall the 
work of winning new positions. The infantry will 
provide target practice for both. 

There will be little likelihood, in Europe, of thé” 
armies playing a primary part in the war until the 
air forces are worn out and the aircraft factories 
bombed to pieces on both sides. But this may happen 
within a month or two. Air forces crack up at a great 
rate when on active service. The British aircraft 
factories had to produce 2,700 machines per month 
in 1918 to keep less than 2,000 machines in active 
use. If all air forces engaged crack, and revolutions 
have not ended the war in its first phase, the light 
tank will begin to make history, and the possibility 
of a fairly long war will emerge. L 

Machine-guns are so much stronger in defence 
than in attack that a military solution is not to be 
expected: a solution through hunger is indicated by 
all modern military history. But while a military 

43 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


decision in the next world war is unlikely, it is pos- 
sible. The industry of one country or group of 
countries may prove—through its level of technique, 
or through the class relations of those who work in 
it—much stronger than the industry of the opposing 
country or group of countries. The application of 
petrol-engine technique to land warfare will certainly 
counteract some of the strength of the machine-gun 
in defence. It will do this both by making it possible 
for troops and weapons to be pushed through and 
past machine-gun ‘nests,’ and by such a development 
of mobility that the opposing forces’ defensive posi- 
tions are made untenable. 

The speed of movement of self-contained forces, 
battalions of infantry and batteries of artillery, has 
been pushed up to extraordinary levels recently. 
This makes possible outflanking movements stretched 
over hundreds of miles. o 

The mobility of infantry remained at a fixed level 
for more than two thousand years ; only picked troops 
could equal the marching power of the Roman 
legions. Then came the development of railways 
and later of road transport. Railways do not give 
true mobility, the power to move in any direction; 
nor do they give the mobility during actual battle 
that is the vital factor. When they have to be built, 
as in the Egypt-Palestine campaign, progress is 
limited to a few miles a day. Road and cross-country 
transport, on the other hand, gives true mobility. 
The strategic importance of this form of transport 
was underlined early in the war, when General Gal- 
lieni’s taxi-cabs took troops from the Paris area to 


44 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


Von Kluck’s flank, during the critical stage of the 
battle of the Marne. Its tactical importance was 
made clear at Cambrai and in the final battles of the 
war. 

This form of transport did not reach full develop- 
ment during the war. It is only since then that we 
have seen self-contained units of all arms swung across 
the map by petrol. And during 1932 the scheduled 
pace of movement for a British infantry battalion, 
the slowest unit of a ‘mechanized’ brigade, was 
raised at one bound from 15 m.p.h. to 20 m.p.h. 

In the same way the speed of movement of field 
artillery has been raised from that of the horse-drawn 
battery, not much faster than Wellington’s guns, to 
that of the ‘dragon’ tractor, capable of 20 m.p.h. or 
more. A general increase in mobility has taken place 
that makes possible a war of manceuvre so long as 
the factories can continue to supply transport, 
machinery, and tanks. But new methods of defence, 
anti-tank guns, etc., make it unlikely that the 
manoeuvre phase will last until victory is won; a 
deadlock will be reached in all probability. 

Speed, of course, is not everything : the fire-power 
of a division has increased with its mobility. This 
has occurred mainly through the development of the 
machine-gun as the dominant weapon of the army. | 

Figures are not available for the exact number of 
machine-guns allotted to a British division now; and 
progress is so rapid that they would probably be out 
of date if available But it is known that in 1913 a 
United States division of infantry had 24 machine- 
guns, capable of firing 12,000 shots per minute 


45 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


maximum. In 1930 such a division had 947 machine- 
guns, capable of over 470,000 shots per minute. The 
maximum potential fire-power of the division (in- 
cluding rifles but excluding artillery) had thus 
increased by 200 per cent. 

Most British battalions have now a machine- 
gun company consisting of three machine-gun 
platoons and a light mortar platoon. In addition, 
there are brigade machine-guns, divisional machine- 
guns and light mortars, and the machine-guns of the 
armoured vehicles attached to each division. 

From the time of Agincourt until the latter half of 
the Great War the dominant weapon in warfare could 
be handled by a single man, and that man could 
carry in battle all the munitions required in a day’s 
fighting. This weapon—bow, musket, rifle—was a 
tool that needed little mechanical skill in making, 
handling or maintenance. Modern rifles could be 
produced, in 1914, by workshops without a high 
level of technique; rifles were made in Persia, 
Afghanistan and China. 

From 1916 the machine-gun began, on the Western 
Front, to replace the rifle as the dominant weapon. 
(By dominant weapon is meant the principal creator 
of casualties and principal instrument in imposing 
the will of one force on another, which is mainly but 
not entirely done by creating casualties.) The 
machine-gun needs considerable mechanical skill in 
making, handling and maintenance. It can only be 
produced by machine-tools working to fine limits. It 
also needs the co-operation of several men in a day’s 
fighting, and to maintain full effective use for a day 


46 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


may need four to ten times more ammunition than 
its crew can themselves carry in attack. 

The fighting round Chapei during 1932 has shown 
that the machine-gun maintains, or even has in- 
creased, its predominance. Chinese machine-gun- 
ners were able to maintain themselves in the Woo- 
sung forts against attack by all weapons, as the 
German machine-gunners held the ground at 
Paschendaele. The Japanese tanks and armoured 
cars failed to defeat snipers in the city and machine- 
gunners in the rice-fields. 

The dependence of the machine-gun on a con- 
tinual flow of ammunition, its need for skilled hand- 
ling and maintenance (even if the gun gets these, 
the life of a machine-gun unit in battle is usually 
described as ‘all jam’), its dependence on the 
micrometer-gauge and first-class metallurgy in 
manufacture make this weapon typical of modern 
technical advance. But it is, of course, not nearly 
so complicated a piece of engineering as the aero- 
plane engine, or so dependent on supplies as a tank. 

An aeroplane in the air is, for a number of hours, 
a self-contained military unit. But an aeroplane 
squadron with its workshops and transport is a very 
complex economic group dependent on the steel 
and engineering industries throughout almost all 
their range, needing wireless parts, delicate instru- 
ments, chemicals (for special fuels, and ‘dope’ for 
fabrics), benzol from coal, specially-made tyres, 
light metal alloys and a dozen other things. If the 
supply of any of these is held up, the squadron is 
helpless. 


47 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Because of the complete dependence of all modern 
weapons on the factory, these changes in the tech- 
nique of warfare will not have the results in practice 
that are sometimes expected from them. They will 
not make it easier to fight the Soviet Union, or to 
reconquer a lost colony, or to wipe out working-class 
revolutionary forces within each imperialist State. 

——the development of scientific machinery for warfare 
makes it easier to start but not to win such wars. 

To begin a war, with new and overwhelming 
machines in your possession, becomes a matter of 
confident (but unfounded) optimism, as at Shanghai 
in 1932, when the Japanese expected to crush the 
Chinese resistance in a few days; it is also easier for 
governments to postpone the actual outbreak of a 
nationalist revolt (as in India) by a show of over- 
whelming force. But when the test comes—whether 
of armoured cars in Peshawar or of tanks in Chapei 
—the results are not in accord with the expectations 
of the General Staffs. © 

When carried beyond a certain point each 
development of military technique makes the im- 
perialist State weaker as against the enemies men- 
tioned. This may seem, at first sight, absurd ; surely 
a new and better weapon strengthens the fighting 
power of the man who holds it? Certainly it does, 
we can answer; but who holds this weapon? And 
does the weapon need, for its use, the obedient 
service of many other men, some of them outside the 
armed forces altogether? New weapons must be 
judged not only by their efficiency as weapons but 

_ also by two other standards: their tect on the pro- 


48 i 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


cess of class differentiation within the armed force in 
question, and their effect on the dependence of this 
armed force on the products ofa skilled working class. 

In the next war the decisive factor will be not the 
potential killing-power but the actual will-power, 
solidarity and endurance of the opposing forces. 
Class differentiation, shortages of supplies due to 
strikes at home, and other factors of this sort will 
affect the will and endurance of the troops. 

An effect of the development of modern technique 
of warfare is that the competence of commanders in 
relation to the weapons employed decreases. (Ap- 
pointment to high command for reasons of seniority 
and social influence will, of course, continue; the 
officer who plays polo will still advance over the head 
of the officer who ‘swots’ metallurgy.) 

At one stage of a war on the Soviet Union or on 
China, India, etc., this inability of the command to 
handle its new weapons will be one of the biggest 
revolutionizing factors at work among the troops. 
It affects officers as much as men, ‘patriots’ as much 
as those with a different outlook. Just as members 
of the Russian nobility. and capitalist class turned 
against Tsarism in March 1917, for ‘patriotic’ 
reasons, out of a desire to press forward with the 
war, so will officers of the next Expeditionary Force 
kick against cavalry generals, and Camberley staffs © 
who think they are engineers because they can tune 
the engines of sports cars. 

Another effect of modern technique is to create a 
reserve of skilled officers and men who are, in a 
period of capitalist crisis, without employment at an 

D 49 


— 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


early age. In the Boer War period the ‘old soldier’ 
was usually a good soldier. But an old aeroplane is 
never a good one, for fighting purposes. Therefore 
a system of ‘short-service’ commissions is employed 
in the Air Force; this turns young officers out into 
the search for civilian jobs at ages between 28 and 
35. These young men, after years of unemploy- 
ment or uncongenial employment, will return to their 
Force in war-time as administrators or observers with 
enthusiasm. But their experiences will have left a 
mark, and as the enthusiasm wanes they will be 
able to realize from their own lives the emptiness of 


_-Patriotic’ propaganda. 


a 


It was a grievance amongst the infantry in the war 
that they were getting a shilling a day for fighting, 
while a first-class air mechanic far behind the lines 
got four shillings a day. This differentiation is 
increased by each advance in technique, and its 
effect on fighting efficiency will be seen when the 
pinch comes. 

The physical and mental strain imposed by the 
new weapons must also be noted. The war-strain in 
a tank or submarine rapidly creates crippling 
neuroses or otherwise destroys health. War used to 
be a slow, toilsome pursuit rather like agriculture ; 
now it is a ‘speeded-up’ industry run at a killing 
pace. Each individual needs reserves of physical 
and mental strength to stick it. As capitalist society 
divides more and more into a class rotted by leisure 
and luxury and a class physically damaged by 
poverty and hunger, the imperialist forces will not 
find it possible to retain the morale needed. 


50 


WAR FROM THE AIR 


The ‘lumpen-proletariat’ and the agricultural 
- workers are no longer the main source for recruits. 
A better-educated, mechanically adaptable type is 
needed to handle aircraft, vehicles and machine- 
guns. This type is mainly drawn from the industrial- 
proletariat, and particularly from young workers in 
the engineering trades. The background of the 
youngsters in the forces now is no longer the farm 
or the fish-and-chip trade; it is the unemployment 
exchange, the Bedaux system, the parents out of 
work, and the chained slavery of the moving ‘con- 
veyor.” 

One further effect of modern technique which 
may seem trivial, but is of great importance, must be 
mentioned. The ‘craftsman’ in the forces cannot be 
treated for disciplinary purposes in the same way as 
even the most expert rifleman. Wireless is being 
developed enormously; most tanks and aircraft are 
fitted with it, and even machine-gun units are often 
controlled by portable wireless. The wireless opera- 
tor or mechanic cannot be given ‘fatigues’ implying 
any heavy manual work; these would spoil his fine- 
ness of touch when handling small parts and tools 
and sending-keys. Thus the ‘disciplinary’ sergeant- 
major is prevented from employing his normal minor 
bullyings, in the case of a few men in each unit; 
which only shows up their irritating absurdity the 
more when they are employed on others. 

It is difficult to inflict any punishment except 
stoppage of pay on a skilled mechanic whose services 
are urgently needed. In an Air Force squadron a 
‘rigger’ may be confined to the guardroom on a 


5I 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


serious charge. A machine crashes in landing; it 
must be repaired. The rigger is at once told to ‘hop 
it and get on with the job.’ Each development of 
specialization makes more difficult, in this way, the 
maintenance of arbitrary discipline. And arbitrary 
discipline is the only sort that can exist in a capitalist 
force. | 

These factors increasing class differentiation in 
the forces will only, of course, be supplementary to 
- the general effect of the capitalist crisis on the work- 
ing class and petty bourgeoisie, from which the ranks 
and nine-tenths of the officers are drawn. The 
tendencies to disintegration among the troops will be 
still further strengthened if news reaches them of 
their women and their relatives suffering from 
bombs at home. 

But these tendencies will only come to full develop- 
ment after a certain period. This development will 
be considered later in a chapter dealing with the way 
in which modern wars end. 

These, then, are the two things that matter most 
about the new technique of warfare: in the next 
big war the cities will be targets, the armed forces 
will be strained to breaking-point. The results will 
depend on the ability and activity of those who see 
how to build a world in which war will not exist. 


52 


CHAPTER III 
YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


MancuuriA, Mongolia, Eastern Siberia are coun- 
tries from which came the greatest conquerors of 
Asia, men who invaded and ruled China, Russia, 
Central Asia, Hungary, the Caucasus, Baghdad, and 
Persia. Since that incursion into world history, seven 
hundred years ago, these lands were of no great 
Importance until the expansion of two empires, 
Tsarist Russia and Meidji Japan, made of them a 
battlefield thirty years ago. Now it appears prob- 
able that they will become of importance again as 
the first battlefield of the next world war. 

There is a particular cause and a general cause for 
this probability (which is not more than a proba- 
bility: there is plenty of inflammable material in 
other parts of the world, and plenty of sparks). The 
general cause is the antagonism between the whole 
capitalist world and the Soviet Union. This antagon- 
ism embodies in terms of governments and guns, 
trade and diplomacy and thought, the fundamental 
cleavage in the world to-day, the war between the 
classes. It goes deeper than all other antagonisms 
between nations because it expresses the deepest con- 
tradiction in capitalism, and enters right inside each 
capitalist country, is a threat from within as well as 
an obstacle and a possible victim beyond the borders. 


53 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


This antagonism is, of course, directly rooted in 
economics. But it does not get its effect on men’s 
minds from economic facts. There have been out- 
cries, at times, about the competition of Soviet petrol 
on the world market, and ‘Soviet dumping’ of other 
goods. But the Soviet Union needs almost all its 
oil for its own tractors. It needs almost all its surplus 
food for its swiftly growing towns. It has so far suc- 
ceeded in making itself independent of the import of 
machinery that it need not worry to sell overmuch 
of its products to pay for this machinery. Soviet 
Russia has no surplus of capital for which a market 
must be found abroad, no need to judge her own 
prosperity by the amount of goods which she has 
persuaded foreign countries to buy. Her exports do 
not worry world capitalism; they are scarcely half 
those of Tsarist Russia. 

Russia as a market, as the market which could end 
the crisis if it was opened up, is a factor of importance 

__-in the minds of some capitalists; Russia as a source 
~ of possible raw materials, oil, haunts others. But it 
is not in these motives that the real urgency is to be 
felt. 

The antagonism between the Soviet Union and 
world capitalism does not show itself principally in 
the directly economic field, but in that of the class 
war. The Bolsheviks’ crime is that they have made 
Russia an example to the workers in the capitalist 
world. They are the leaders of a force that threatens 
each government in each capitalist State. They 
embody the working-class revolution—and not now 
a revolution in the stage of struggle, of bloodshed and 


54 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


barricades, but a revolution in the stage of new 
factories, great power stations, successful adminis- 
tration of industry. 

It is not in the vast tractor-plants, either, that the 
main and dangerous attraction of this revolution 
lies. It is in the new men and women that the Soviets 
are making. 

There was a hero, to the pre-war generation of 
schoolboys, named Amundsen. And he still seems to 
some the last, and perhaps the greatest, of the heroes 
of the old world of individual courage and action. 
His daring was a fire within caution and scientific 
knowledge. He knew the ice lands and how to live 
on them as no one else. When the Italian airship 
commanded by Nobile crashed north of Spitzbergen, 
Amundsen insisted on going to look for it in a hastily 
purchased and not very suitable aeroplane. He 
never came back. A Soviet ice-breaker rescued the 

majority of the Italians. 

_ But the comparison that matters is not that be- 
tween Amundsen the individual hero and the work 
of the Krassin’s crew. It is that between his venture 
and the more recent rescue of the Chelyuskin’s men 
and women. Here was a ship crushed in the ice in 
a far more remote and difficult part of the Arctic. 
Patiently, day after day, a nation moved every 
available plane and dog and sledge to the terrible 
coast south of them. Patiently they waited, who had 
flown up through the snow and storm, for the 
weather that would give them a chance. When the 
weather came, and their orders released them, they 
made journey after journey, loading their ’planes 

55 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


with three times the number of people, in one case 
six times, that are normally carried as passengers. 
And—gallant gesture!—they ended by bringing 
back to the mainland every fit dog that remained 
of the Chelyuskin’s sledge teams. Risks were taken in 
plenty, there was courage and a refusal to accept 
disaster. But there was this new factor: the whole 
effort had been a collective one, the heroism was 
almost anonymous, a nation took part in the struggle. 
Who kept those aeroplane engines fit for work in 
seventy degrees of frost? We have not been told, 
and shall not be; it was the Soviet Union. Who 
flew the transport ’planes that kept the camps sup- 
plied with petrol? The Soviet Union! The men 
who carried through this job are the stuff and self of 
the new Socialist country. And it is the example of 
these people and the different life they are creating 
that stirs and wakens minds in every country. 
Because of them the rulers who know what unem- 
ployment and ‘depression’ are doing to their own 
subjects hate the Soviets. 
Unemployment, world crisis, depression, and 
Japan’s economic needs shape the particular cause 
r a war in and near Manchuria. Japan is the 
<_weéakest, industrially and financially, of all the great 
~~ Powers. Her industries make cheap goods, her 
economic structure includes enormous trusts on the 
one hand and feudal agriculture on the other, while 
until the crisis her exports included much raw 
material. Like other countries producing raw 
materials, Japan has felt the pinch of falling prices, 
during the crisis, extremely badly. The reasons why 


56 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


Japanese capitalism is forced by the crisis to a 
policy of expansion at all costs have been stated 
fairly fully by two Englishmen, H. Hessell Tiltman 
and Colonel P. T. Etherton.* These reasons have 
been given dramatic expression by Mr. Lees Smith, 
who was at one time Minister of Education in a 
- Labour Government. Speaking on March 19, 1932, 
at a time when the Japanese bombers were over 
Shanghai, he said: ‘How is Japan to live? She is 
desperate. If we were in her position, we should not 
die quietly, but we should undoubtedly burst out 
somewhere as she has done in Manchuria and 
Shanghai.’ 

The pressure of the crisis weighs heavily on 
_ Japan’s working class. The wage index compiled by 
the Mitsubishi Bank shows a fall, for time rates, 
from 96.2 in 1930 to 85.1 in 1933. 

‘Japan is to-day in the situation of a country that 
must overflow its boundaries,’ wrote an Americanf 
ten years ago. ‘Only about one-sixth of her total 
area of 176,000 square miles (including Formosa, but 
not Korea) is under cultivation, because so much of 
it to the north is cold—too cold, that is, for typical 
Japanese agriculture—and a large part of the rest 
is mountainous. Her poets sing the praises of Fuji- 
yama, but the mountain cannot grow rice. Sixty- 
_ one million people are crowded together on an area 
only a little larger than that of California. The 
average size of a farm is two and a half acres.’ 


* P. T. Etherton and H. Hessell Tiltman: Japan, Mistress of the 
Pacific and Manchuria, the Cockpit of Asia. 
t Isaiah Bowman, Director of the American Geographical Society, 
The New World, London, 1924, p. 502. 
57 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


This population-pressure is not, of course, the 
cause of Japan’s ‘need for expansion’ and the 
aggressive policy which, since Mr. Bowman wrote, 
has added Manchuria to the Japanese Empire—an 
area twice as large as that of Japan itself. Nor is this 
expansion and aggression a cure for the desperate - 
straits of the Japanese population. It will benefit 
only the Japanese bankers, munition makers, in- 
vestors, and others of their class, whase total known 
investments in industry, transport, banks and agri- 
culture increased by over 500 per cent. between 
1913 and 1928.* 

How little pressure of population has to do with 
the causes of poverty in any country, quite apart 
from war, can be seen from the recent example of 
Holland. The Dutch have recently ‘expanded,’ not 
by war, but by enclosing and draining a large pro- 
portion of the Zuyder Zee. The old map of Europe 
we all knew ten years ago has been altered, looks 
strange. Here is new land. And the Dutch got to 
work to sow this land with crops that would work 
the salt out of the soil. They succeeded. 

Then they grew grain, mainly barley. No market 
for it—so they fattened cattle on it and sold the 
cattle in Germany. And now there is no market for 
cattle in Germany. 

While they had a market, their cattle undersold 
the Danish cattle. And because of this (and because 
the world’s children need less Danish cheese and 
butter) the magnificent Frisian herds of Denmark are 
going every week to special Government-established 

8 S. Dashinsky, Japan in Manchuria, London, 1932. 
5 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


incinerators, are being burnt to save the cost of their 
keep. And a special machine has been invented to 
crush the carcasses of other cattle into pig-food. 
Which would be sensible—if there was not a dwind- 
ling market for Danish bacon. 

Holland, with about 500 persons to each square 
mile, is more heavily populated than the British 
Isles, which have about 400 persons per square mile. 
But it is not the ‘pressure of population and the urge 
for expansion,’ to quote Sir James Jeans’ ‘explana- 
tion’ of the causes of war, that could make the 
people of Holland ready for war. It is the system of 
production, exchange and finance that, however 
they expand their frontiers, constricts their lives, 
forces on them unemployment, ‘bad trade,’ long 
hours, low wages, the starving of every human 
faculty, the flatness of life. That flatness of life is not 
due to Holland’s geography or population: it is due 
to the arrangements between men by which men 
get their living. 

While pressure of population is neither the cause 
of Japan’s drive towards war, nor can be cured by 
it, it provides the excuse, and the mass support for, 
the Tokyo finance-capitalists’ policy of aggression. 
The principal aims of this policy are to secure con- 
trol of China, the greatest undeveloped market in 
the world, and of Manchuria, Mongolia, Eastern 
Siberia, the greatest ‘open spaces.’ The Japanese 
know that their American rivals will not let them go 
much further in China, without war. They plan, 
therefore, to cripple the power of the Soviet Union 
in the Far East, largely in order to be safer during 


59 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


_the conquest of China and the inevitable war with 
/’ America that will accompany it. 

Their plan has, for reasons to be outlined later, a 
wide measure of support in Britain. When, as an 
essential step in this plan, the Japanese were bomb- 
ing Chapei—to teach the Chinese what would 
happen if they resisted seriously Japan’s winning of 
Manchuria and Mongolia—British policy was to 
‘hold the ring,’ to prevent any interference. The 
Daily Telegraph, speaking as usual for the British 
Foreign Office, stated that Sir John Simon’s aim at 
Geneva was to ‘prevent the League and Great 
Britain from becoming involved in unwise and un- 
necessary measures of a coercive character’ (against 
Japan). The British Ambassador in Tokyo assured 
the Japanese Government that there was no ‘pro- 
Chinese feeling in Britain.” The Morning Post, pub- 
lishing a Japanese proposal for war on Soviet Russia 
after the seizure of Manchuria, assured the Japanese 
in a leading article of British ‘goodwill.’ 

More material support was given: hundreds of 
tons of chemicals for explosives, many Rolls-Royce 
aero-engines, machine-guns, Short flying-boats, six- 
wheeled cars were sold and exported to Japan. 

At this time, in 1932, French imperialism was 
equally in favour of a Japanese attack on the Soviet 
Union. The Jnformation SONON Financière of 
Paris wrote: 


‘Japan, as the soldier of civilization, is able to 
defeat Bolshevism, which stands with one foot in 
Asia and the other in Europe, ae is aiming at the 
downfall of both continents. 

60 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


©The Soviet power is most vulnerable in the forests 
of Siberia, and if Europe understands its duty to 
civilization, the boundless steppes of Siberia may in 
the near future become the battlefield and the grave 
of Bolshevism. ’ 


The operative words here are ‘if Europe under- 
stands’; they mean ‘if European armies and air 
forces help the Japanese.’ But this could not be 
achieved—yet. Japan had to have time to prepare, 
also. Then Hitler came to power in Germany, 
pledged by his book Mein Kampf, and by all his 
political and financial backing, to war on the Soviet | 
Union. 

Here was the moment, then? No, history is a web, 
not a skein. Hitler’s advent frightened French 
imperialism: if Germany and Japan overran the 
Soviet Union, would not Germany become too 
strong? Would not her strength then threaten 
France? Because of these fears, Germany had to 
wait; Hitler had to make peaceful speeches. A slow 
process of negotiation for new pledges of ‘security’ to 
France was undertaken. British policy walked a 
tight-rope between French policy and German, and 
now, in February 1935, by the proposed ‘air pact,’ 
has found a formula that seems likely to remove 
French fears and wean France from her sudden 
‘friendliness’ for the Soviet Union, a ‘friendliness’ 
assumed out of fear of Germany. These moves, and 
perhaps more, were necessary preparations for and 
pressures towards the war that Japan has been 
planning. 

What will be the strategical aims of the com- 

61 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


batants in this second Russo-Japanese war? On 
what fronts will their forces meet? What military 
tendencies can be foreseen in such a war? These 
questions are not the main questions which will 
determine the outcome of the war. The main ques- 
tions are the available strength, moral and material, 
of the governments and of the classes supporting 
them, together with the strength of the allies or 
associates on either side. But if it is possible to get 
some idea of the aims, the battlefields and the 
military tendencies, and the way in which these will 
affect and be affected by the modern technique of 
war, we shall be better able to understand the news 
that will reach us when this war breaks out, better 
able to work against an extension of the war to 
include ourselves. In an appendix to this book, 
which begins on p. 239, we give an outline of the 
fronts and the forces, and an estimate of the probable 
military tendencies. Here we need deal only with 
the war aims, the methods of starting such a war, 
and its effect on Japan. 

~The principal war aim on the side of the Soviet 
Government will necessarily be to secure peace 
rapidly. They will desire to ‘scare off’ the govern- 
ments and groups of politicians in Europe who 
might be tempted to swing their States in with Japan 
as allies. They may desire to get some form of buffer 
state on the Siberian frontier, some government or 
provisional regime in North Manchuria and Inner 
Mongolia which will remove the threat, now ever 
present, of an invasion cutting the trans-Siberian 
railway. 


62 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


A secondary war aim will bs to give the popula- 
tions of Inner Mongolia, Manchuria, Korea, and 
even of Japan itself, the opportunity to rid them- 
selves of the tyrannous oppression of Japanese 
imperialism. It will never be far from the minds of 
the Soviet leaders that a sequel to the war may be a 
proletarian revolution in Japan. 

The immediate strategical aim will therefore be 
to win an early and considerable victory, probably 
on the main front near Manchuli, and later perhaps 
to occupy temporarily the railway line (of which the 
Soviet Government is or was part owner) that runs 
across the northern half of Manchuria. 

The principal war aims of the Japanese Govern- 
ment will be to win territory as colonies, markets and 
sources of raw materials, and to cripple the military 
strength of the Soviet Union, so that in a future war 
in the Pacific, Japan need fear nothing from the 
only great Power close to her shores. To shake the 
Soviet Government out of power will be the aim of 
the more optimistic Japanese military leaders (and 
of many military leaders and politicians far from 
Japan). In pursuit of these aims the Japanese need, 
and believe they can get, allies in Europe. 

Their immediate strategical aim, if they have to 
start this war before all their potential allies will 
move, must be to win—and announce—a consider- 
able success at an early stage of the war. Such a 
success need not necessarily be a complete victory in 
a battle or series of battles. It may be a successful 
invasion and occupation of a region which the 
Soviet armies cannot defend effectively during the 


63 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


first months of war (either for geographical reasons 
or because of the original disposition of the Soviet 
forces). It may be a manceuvre or raid that cuts the 
trans-Siberian railway. 

The Japanese army chiefs are working for a suc- 
cess of this order, so that their potential allies in the 
west may be encouraged to attempt some variant of 
the route that Napoleon took in 1812. 

The territories that the Japanese do not hide their 
desire to occupy are: 


Inner Mongolia. 

Outer Mongolia (now the Mongolian Peoples’ 
Republic). 

The Maritime Province (Vladivostock, etc.). 

‘Soviet Sakhalin. 

The trans-Baikal Province. 

Kamschatka and the Yakutsk coast.* 


Inner Mongolia is formally a Chinese province. It 
is already partly under Japanese control. It is a 
possible future area for colonization, and also a path- 
way to richer provinces of China. 

Outer Mongolia is an independent Republic allied 
to the Soviet Union. It is strategically of great value 
to Japan because it lies near the trans-Siberian 
railway. Both sections of Mongolia contain coal and 
iron in amounts not yet known but certainly con- 
siderable. 

The Maritime Province contains ie great Bort of 
Vladivostock, immense timber resources (Japan 


* See map on p. 257. 
64 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


imports timber) and fisheries and farms. The town 
of Khabarovsk has recently become important 
industrially. This province has a long coast line 
only 400 miles from Japan. If the Japanese can 
seize and secure the Maritime Province they will be 
fairly safe from air raids during any Pacific war 
fought during the next five or ten years. This would 
also mean safer sea communications between Japan 
and Korea, Manchuria and Northern China in such 
a war. On these sea communications Japan depends 
for food and raw materials. 

Sovtet Sakhalin, the northern half of this island, 
contains oil. It is also ‘necessary’ to Japan in any 
war with the U.S.A., together with 

_ Kamschatka and the coasts to the north, because 
a naval war between Japan and the U.S.A. would 
be fought—to a large extent—along the coasts of 
Siberia and Alaska. 

Trans-Baikalia is economically, and from the point 

_of view of world prestige, more valuable than any of 
the other prizes. Here is a rich province, full of 
minerals, gold, platinum, iron and coal, ready for 
intensive development, and with far fewer climatic 
and geographical drawbacks than the other pro- 
vinces. It is the biggest prize, so big that Japanese 
strategy may be unduly deflected towards it. 

The rulers of both countries, as of others, clearly 
realize that a war between them will develop at some 
point or other into a world war. That is the domi- 
nating factor which governs the use that they will 
make of their armies and air forces during the first 
campaigning season. There is one other factor of 

E 65 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


principal importance: the Japanese will have the 
initiative in the sense that they are likely to choose 
the time for the declaration of war. They will 
‘kick off.’ 

The advantage of the initiative at the outset of a 
war is small if the battlefield is restricted, and the 
invaders’ route is certain. The advantage is large if 
the battle front stretches, as in this case, for some 
thousands of miles, and the possible objectives are 
several. 

The probable ‘reasons’ for the war, the excuses 
with which ‘world opinion’ will be mobilized on the 
Japanese side, can only be guessed. They will 
probably include an accusation that the Soviet 
Union has sent its army over the frontier into Mon- 
golia. The Mongolian People’s Republic has 
already had to withdraw troops from its frontier 
because Japanese forces have pushed over the line. 
In a future ‘scrap’ of this sort, the Soviet Union will 
be accused of intervening. The world’s press is 
willing to make much of such an accusation. The 
clumsy journalists who serve Messrs. Odhams on the 
Daily Herald thought in 1931 that the time had come 
for this boosting: on November 14, 1931, when the 
Japanese troops were fighting through Manchuria, 
the Herald reported prominently that ‘the troops of 
the Chinese General Ma are strengthened by a 
Russian brigade.’ The Herald did not print the 
denial of this story issued by the Japanese Ambassa- 
dor in Washington, 

Another possible excuse for the war is a fake 
bombing raid. The Soviet bombers include machines 
66 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


that are almost indistinguishable from the German 
Junkers four-engined monoplanes. The Japanese 
possess some of these *planes, bought in Germany. 
An easy matter to stage a ‘bombing raid’ by Soviet 
aeroplanes on some unimportant Japanese or Man- 
churian town—photograph it, film it, declare war. 
And who would print the Soviet denials, from The 
Times to the Daily Herald? 

The forces at the disposal of the Soviet Union 
seem likely to be smaller in number than those 
employed by Japan ; but the air force will be stronger, 
and the Soviet ’planes will drop leaflets as well as 
bombs. | 

It is impossible to estimate the effect, on the 
Japanese forces, of propaganda of this sort, increased 
by the effect of modern technique on the stability of 
all capitalist armies. In this connection it is neces- 
sary to note the vigorous and successful anti-war 
work carried out by Japanese Communists in their 
army. During the fighting in Shanghai an illegal 
paper, the Outpost, was reported by the Shanghai 
press to be circulating among the Japanese troops. 
The official telegraph agency, ‘Simbun Rengo,’ then 
reported that students of the Shanghai High School, 
in the Japanese Concession, had been arrested for 
Communist propaganda among soldiers and sailors. 

In September 1934 the Japan Advertiser reported 
arrests at the Yokohama aviation school for ‘red 
propaganda.’ In October 1934 the newspaper 
Asachi reported the arrest of five soldiers of the 31st 
regiment, for the same reason. WNishi-Nisht, one of 
the more important Tokyo papers, reported 120 such 

67 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


arrests in Osaka in October 1934 and in November 
an unstated number of arrests of soldiers of the 
Tokyo garrison, for distributing literature. 

Kayamoto, writing in International Press Correspon- 
dence for December 10, 1934, quotes newspaper 
reports during 1934 of the arrests of fifty seamen in 
Kobe, ten workers at Osaka, five Communists in 
aircraft factories, two in a Tokyo armament firm, etc. 

Mutinies of troops of the 13th regiment, of a com- 
pany in Mukden, and of the roth division in Man- 
churia are mentioned by the same writer; in the 
latter case 200 men are said to have been shot. 

With strategical dilemmas ahead of them,* and 
nearly half their army of poor quality (for who could 
rely on Manchukuo troops, conscripted from the 
conquered Chinese?) it seems amazing that the 
Japanese should be going ahead, step by step, 
towards this war. But needs must, when finance 
drives ! 

All the difficulties involved in this war must 
be fairly clear in the minds of the more realistic 
members of the Japanese General Staff. But always, 
when faced with the problem of how to beat an 
enemy who seems stronger, the General Staff of an 
imperialist State develops the theory that its soldiers 
have a superior morale, that it can catch its opponents 
off their guard, that it can succeed by ‘a furious rush 
upon the foe.” This was the French theory in the 
first months of 1914. The Japanese Staff have deve- 
loped it in the form of a theory of ‘sudden attack.’ 
It is a theory that has always failed. 


* See appendix, p. 239. 


YENGHIZ KHAN’S COUNTRY 


The dangers of attacking the Soviet Far East are 
so great and so obvious that in spite of this theory 
the Japanese imperialists must necessarily wait for 
the time when allies are ready or very nearly ready 
in the West, in Europe. They will strike when their 
war is sure to spread ; otherwise they know they are 
doomed at once to failure. And even with help from 
the West their chances are none too good! 


69 


CHAPTER IV 
GOERING’S BOMBERS 


‘Ir must be admitted,’ says the writer who for three 
years edited the official communiqués issued by French 
Army Headquarters in the first World War, ‘that 
military art is not incompatible with intelligence, nor 
perhaps with reason.’* 

This certainly must be admitted. On the other 
hand, it is hard work finding traces of intelligence 
and reason in the exploits of the political and mili- 
tary leaders and heroes of the last war. It will be 
harder still in the next. It will-be particularly hard 
if among these heroes—and they are determined to 
be first among them—are the rulers of Hitler’s 
Germany. 

General Goering’s adventures in lunacy are well 
known. A snapshot of one of the less-famous mem- 
bers of Hitler’s cabinet is worth giving: 


‘In 1920 Dr. Rust, then member of the Hanover 
Local Education Board, asked to be retired on pen- 
sion, submitting, as evidence that he was no longer 
capable of performing his duties, medical certificates 
that he suffered from insanity. 

‘During his trial for a sexual offence, Professor 
Forster, psychologist of Greifswald University, ex- 


* Jean de Pierrefeu, Plutarch Lied, English translation, London, 
1924—an invaluable introduction to the true greatness of generals. 


70 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


amined him and testified that he was not responsible 
for his actions. 

‘In 1933, in the Third Reich, Dr. Rust became 
Prussian Minister for Culture, in charge of educa- 
tion throughout Prussia. 

‘On September 12, 1933, the Frankfurter Zeitung 
reported the “suicide” of Professor Forster. 

-= ‘In 1934, Dr. Rust was promoted Reichs Minister 
for Education, in charge of education throughout all 
the Reich.’* 


In the schools controlled by this gentleman the 
children are taught ‘patriotism.’ One of the songs 
they must sing is ‘Gegen Ostland wollen wir mar- 
schieren’—‘ We will march against the East.’ Even 
before school age the German child is under the 
influence of such men as Dr. Rust. The Frankfurter 
Nachrichter of October 30, 1933, boasts of it: 


‘Halt! March at attention! Eyes right! A four- 
year-old is in command. Two three-year olds form 
the Storm Troops. ... The tiny fists obey regula- 
tions and are held to the seam of the trousers. Their 
backs are so bent backwards in the effort to hold 
themselves straight that they can hardly keep their 
balance. You can see that spectacle to-day in the 
parks, the courtyards, the gardens, the pavements, 
in every part of the town. ... And those who see 
it are filled with joy. ... The soldier has awakened 
in the German child, the soldier who is inherently 
within him.’ 

Dr. Ley, leader of the Nazi ‘Labour Front’ 
organization, says, ‘We start our work when the 

* Heil, a Picture Book, London, 1934. 

t Quoted in Hitler Re-arms, London, 1934. 

7I 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


child is three. As soon as he begins to think, a little 
flag is there to be put in his hand.’ 

These certificated educators work in this way on 
the cannon-fodder for the third or fourth World War; 
it can be imagined with what vigour they train 
young men for the second! On January 1, 1934, 
compulsory ‘labour service’ was to have been insti- 
tuted throughout Germany. This ‘labour service’ 
includes practice in entrenching, throwing hand- 
grenades, marching with packs; the men are organ- 
ized into troops of sixteen; four troops make a 
platoon; three platoons a detachment; nine detach- 
ments a ‘group.’ According to the Deutscher Führer 
(September 21, 1933) about 250,000 men had then 
been organized ‘voluntarily’ into 4,500 camps.: The 
military training given at these camps is kept secret, . 
for fear of foreign protests. But English students who 
went to an International Students’ welfare-work 
conference in Rendsburg, Holstein, in April 1934, 
saw some of the procedure. 

During the conference, states one of these students, * 
visits were paid to ‘labour camps.’ ‘A band of 
trainees from the Leaders’ School was seen marching 
out into the woods near Rendsburg late one night. 
A Nazi delegate was asked where they were going, ` 
and after a moment’s hesitation said: “For a drink.” 

‘Next morning the delegates witnessed a drill dis- 
play in which some of these lads took part, and one 
of them was noticed to have a badly bleeding knee. 
On being asked how it happened, he replied: “On 
the barbed wire during drilling last night.” 

* In International Press Correspondence, No. 26, of 1934. 

72 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


‘In the barracks, 44 miles from the place of work, 
notices were found, giving instructions for travel. 
“If anyone in the train tries to talk to you about the 
camps, politely change the conversation. It is not 
your job to talk, and you will thus avoid spreading 
false impressions about the camps through inex- 
perience.” ’ 

The number of youths in these camps will reach 
a million, the Nazis plan, in 1935. And when they 
are described as ‘voluntary, this word means that 
you lose your job or your unemployment relief if you 
refuse to go. ‘Compulsory? would mean—as in 
Britain now under the new Unemployment Act— 
that you could be sent to prison if you did not go. In 
Germany an opponent of the Nazi plans is sent to 
.prison or concentration camp for other reasons. 
But the aim is to make this service compulsory : this 
has been postponed only owing to the international 
protests made. 

The drug-maniacs and sex-maniacs who control 
these forces are certainly likely to ‘march to the 
East.’ That is the whole trend of their policy. The 
Berlin correspondent of the Tokyo paper, Nishi- 
Nishi, wrote in January 1935 that: 


‘The assurance of Japan’s aid for Germany would 
not be a bad stroke of policy, it seems to me, since 
the possibilities of resistance by the U.S.S.R. in the 
East would thus be weakened. 

‘Such a policy would also strengthen the chances of 
a war between the U.S.S.R. and Germany, on the 
one hand, and between the U.S.S.R. and Japan on 
the other.’ 


13 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


The correspondent of the Neshi-Nishi is closely in 
touch with the Nazi Foreign Office. The message 1s 
virtually an official bid for an immediate alliance 
between these two Powers and an immediate war 
on the U.S.S.R. 

In a later part of this message the correspondent 
remarks that ‘Germany is tightening her connec- 
tions with Yugoslavia, extending her influence to 
Esthonia and Latvia, thence threatening the 
U.S.S.R? 

While this message was being printed in Tokyo, 
Sir Oswald Mosley was allowed the vast circulation 
of Lord Rothermere’s Sunday Dispatch to advocate 
that the people of Britain should support a war drive 
to the east by Germany. ‘The future of Germany,’ 
he wrote, ‘must lie on her eastern frontiers in an 
empire to which the future sets no limit.’ (January 
13, 1935-) 

The British Foreign Office, it is openly admitted, 
is working to get German rearmament ‘legalized’ ; 
while at the same time Mr. Baldwin’s declaration 
that ‘our frontier is now on the Rhine,’ the agree- 
ments reached by the French and Italian Govern- 
ments at Rome, and the ‘air pact’ now (February 
1935) in process of negotiation, bar all employment 
to these new armaments in a western or southern 
direction. Only the road to the East remains. 

And Germany, like Japan, ‘must burst out.’ 

The defeat of the ‘united front’ of Socialists, 
Communists, and Catholics in the Saar is Hitler’s 
first victory in foreign affairs since he seized power, 
and will encourage every force in Germany that 


14 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


works for immediate war. It is a victory won by the 
most brutal intimidation (not restrained in any way 
by the League of Nations officials in power during 
the plebiscite or by the troops used as ‘an inter- 
national police force’), a victory won by the expendi- 
ture of a good deal of money, and by reckless 
demagogy. Saarlanders were given holidays in parts 
of Germany where everything seemed pleasant—to 
the casual visitor. The radio, the press, the count- 
less paid speakers and organizers worked not only by 
rousing hopes but also by stirring up all the resent- 
ment of the people against the French rulers and 
exploiters, the men who brought Negro troops to the 
Saar at the end of the war. The Nazi formula—t1o 
per cent. of pretty promises, 20 per cent. of nationalist 
hatred, 70 per cent. of crude force, from eviction and 
victimization up to and including murder—has suc- 
ceeded in the Saar as it succeeded in Berlin. 

On January 15, 1935, immediately the Saar 
plebiscite figures were announced, a Paris paper, the 
Liberté, wrote that this was ‘the first great inter- 
national success of Germany since Hitler’s advent, 
and it will give back to Hitlerism all its virulence 
and sharpen its appetite.’ 

But there are not only appetites and needs that 
must be considered : there is also fear. In particular, 
one fear. It is impossible to explain the reckless 
violence of Germany’s rulers—whether we try to use 
the ordinary terms of intelligence and reason, or the 
less usual terms of morbid psychology—except by the 
overmastering desire to end, to escape from, a fear. 

Hitler, Goebbels, Goering, and the financiers who 

75 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


equipped them for power and control them, are 
afraid of the Communist revolution. 

The most experienced capitalist politician in 
Europe has warned his countrymen not to tread too 
heavily on the new Germany’s toes. Lloyd George 
has said, according to a press report: 


‘He knew that there had been horrible atrocities 
in Germany, and they all deplored and condemned 
them, but a country passing through a revolution 
was always liable to ghastly episodes owing to the 
administration of justice being seized there and then 
by infuriated rebels. 

‘He was neither a Nazi nor a Fascist nor a Com- 
munist. If the powers succeeded in overthrowing 
Nazism in Germany, what might follow? Not a 
Conservative, Socialist, or Liberal regime, but ex- 
treme Communism. Surely that could not be their 
objective. 

‘A Communist Germany would be infinitely more 
formidable than a Communist Russia. The Ger- 
mans would know how to run Communism effec- 
tively.’ (Speech at Barmouth, September 9, 1933.) 


- A representative of the most responsible capitalist 
newspaper in Europe has printed the following: 


‘Those who take a long view of history may ponder 
the fact that the Communist Party, as an organiza- 
tion, alone survives of all the parties that National 
Socialism has destroyed. The Conservatives, the 
Socialists, the Catholics, the Democrats, the Liberals, 
all have been swept into the dustbin of time. 

‘The Communist Party, which it was the primary 
purpose of National Socialism to destroy, remains— 


76 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


a skeleton force, working underground, its members 
still apparently in organized relationship with each 
other, its activities pursued in spite of obstacle— 
waiting for its opportunity, waiting for National 
Socialism to collapse in the stress of a new war or 
some such thing. ... The Communist Party stripped 
like a tree by autumnal frosts but still there rooted, 
ready to bud.’ (The Burning of the Reichstag, by 
Douglas Reid, special correspondent of The Times at 
the Leipzig trial.) 


Ready to bud! The Nazis themselves have given 
us plenty of evidence of that readiness. In the sum- 
mer of 1934, months after they had decreed the 
complete and final eradication of Marxism from 
German life, their own papers reported with glee the 
arrest of a Communist organizer who had come back 
to Hamburg from abroad. And they reported also 
that this man had been responsible, in nine or ten 
weeks’ work before his arrest, for the enrolment in 
the Communist Party of twelve thousand members! 

Fear of this force, the undefeated and incorruptible 
force of the working class, the men who make the 
guns and ’*planes—this is not something extraneous 
to Fascism or some phase of purely German Fascist 
development; it is the essence and root of Fascism 
itself. Fascism is capitalism in panic, ‘when fear of 
insurrection drives ministers and judges from their 
propriety’—to use the old-fashioned phrases of a 
philosopher so old-fashioned as to believe in liberty. 
It is not, as it is sometimes represented, a movement 
of the middle-classes—it uses the ideas of these 
classes, builds mass-movements under their impul- 


77 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


sion ; but it uses these ideas and movements to serve 
finance-capital, the master of the modern State. 
The Provisional Supreme Economic Council ‘set up 
by the Nazi Government’ (more really, which set up 
the Nazi Government) contains six members who 
directly control or represent firms with an aggregate 
capital of £674,000,000.* The three other members 
of this council are private bankers whose millions 
cannot be estimated. This money, this overwhelming 
claim on the lives and production of the German 
people, Fascism maintains and protects. The 
pressure of this finance-capital, and the desire to 
uproot the stronghold of their fear, forces the Nazi 
leaders towards alliance with Japan and war on 
Soviet Russia. But fear is two-edged; the Soviets 
are strong; there is another side to the picture. 
The direct and indirect economic interests of this 
German finance-capital conflict with the interests of 
finance-capital in other countries, particularly in 
France and England. Because of this conflict and 
because of the fear that masters them, the rulers of 
Germany hesitate to take yet the path eastward, wish 
for a few more easy victories, a few more concessions 
wrung from France and Britain. Such victories— 
union with Austria, recognition of the German right 
to arm, and to arm the frontiers, recognition of Ger- 
many as ‘civilization’s barrier against Bolshevism ’— 
they want to win without a war, certainly. They 
need these things not so much for their actual value 
as for the prestige ensuing : for ‘home consumption’ : 


* R. Palme Dutt, Fascism, London, 1934, p. 82. See the whole of 
this chapter from p. 72 for the class-nature of Fascism. 


78 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


for weapons in the war within minds, the struggle 
against the thing they fear. They are forced to make, 
continually, new demands on Britain and France and 
Italy, forced to bluff. They foster every disruptive 
force in the States surrounding them, that might, by 
upsetting the uneasy balance of Europe, give them 
the chance to snatch some new victory, some rein- 
forcement in prestige that will strengthen them for 
the test of war on the Soviet Union. The gunmen 
who assassinated King Alexander of Yugo-Slavia, 
and M. Barthou, in Marseilles, came from Nazi 
Germany. The gunmen who murdered Dolfuss, the 
Austrian Chancellor, were armed and financed by 
Nazi Germany. The gunman who shot Kirov, the 
Bolshevik leader, was one of a group financed and 
fostered by the Esthonian consul in Leningrad; con- 
trolling Esthonia stand Britain and Nazi Germany. 
To these desperate expedients Hitler’s government 
is driven by its need for successes somewhere, any- 
where, before it tackles the Soviet Union. 

While the slow, difficult negotiations between 
Britain and France, and Italy, that centre round the 
proposed ‘Air Pact,’ drag on, with the aim of detach- 
ing France from her ‘friendliness’ with the Soviet 
Union, some new bluff or coup by the Nazi leaders ° 
may possibly precipitate war in the West. There is 
all the material for it ready. 

The industrial and mining areas of Lorraine, the 
Rhineland, the Saar, the Ruhr, Briey, Belgium, 
Northern France, are inextricably one area, inter- 
dependent, locked together. The frontiers divide this 
area, the world economic crisis throttles it. This, the 


79 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


greatest productive group in Europe, generates enor- 
mous financial forces—but they are antagonistic 
forces, always struggling for a new division of sources 
of wealth that each owns in part. There is French 
money in the German firms, German money in the 
French. This does not make for co-operation, but 
for conflict, a struggle for control, hegemony. 

And the new technique of war means that neither 
side can possibly be safe from the other. 

It may be thought that, because of this, neither 
side dare loose the conflict. True, in a way. But 
when tensions and pressures of this sort accumulate, 
neither side means to force on war. Each endeavours 
by bluff or threat to gain some potential advantage, 
some greater safety—till a move is made that is in 
fact war and is treated as such. And also the capital- 
ists of France and Germany, more than most, know 
how to leave untouched the property of their friends, 
even in a destructive war. The story of how the 
French left intact the Briey mines, 1914-18, is well 
known ;* there was French money in these mines. 
Less well known is the fact that ‘after four years of war 
(1914-18) there was still, between the Hamburg- 
America Company and the French Compagnie 
Générale Transatlantique, a tacit agreement of such 
a nature that on no occasion was a Transatlantique 

boat torpedoed. ’T 
`- Agreements of this sort make war more tolerable 
—for the finance-capitalists. 


* See ‘Briey: a Moral for Patriots,’ appendix to Patriotism, Ltd., 
Union of Democratic Control. 
t Paul Allard, ‘Les Secrets de l’Arriére,’ in Vu, No. 288, Paris. 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


While there is every possibility of a war in the 
West, because of these factors, the more likely thing 
is a war in the East—first. But how can this war in 
the East, the war against the Soviet Union, fail to 
spread to the West? If, in its first stages, the Soviet 
armies have to retreat, if Leningrad is taken, and 
German-Polish armies go far into the Ukraine, will 
French capitalism see with equanimity such a 
strengthening of its age-old rival? Will the Nazi 
leaders and German finance-capitalists, on the other 
hand, with their armies mobilized and successful and 
their air force ‘blooded,’ fail to feel that this is the 
moment, enthusiasm and victory hot in the people’s 
veins, to settle accounts with France? 

Or, take the other road: if Poland crumples up 
like a cocked hat trodden upon, and the new German 
ersatz armies fail, there will be revolution in Ger- 
many. Will France or Britain permit a Soviet 
republic with the Rhine as its frontier? 

Win or lose, the campaign against the Soviet 
Union opens a world war in which Britain is sure to 
be involved. 

It is for the most likely thing, the war close to us, 
the first phase, that the preparations are being made 
now. The Daily Mails Warsaw correspondent 
reported during February 1935 that: 


‘According to what is believed to be authentic 
information, plans are being discussed for a meeting 
between Herr Hitler and Marshal Pilsudski, the 
Dictator of Poland, at which they would discuss the 
possibility of a Polish-German military alliance, the 
provisions of which would include the separation of 

F 81 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


the Ukraine from Russia should war break out in 
the Far East.’ 


General Goering has already met Pilsudski with 
this aim. Nor is Poland the only power involved 
along with Germany. Von Papen was in Sweden 
‘for an elk hunt’ in October 1934. Mr. Anthony 
Eden arrived in Stockholm at the same time. A 
commentator wrote : 


‘Neither Mr. Eden nor Herr von Papen were sur- 
prised at the fact that for some time Sweden and 
Denmark have been discussing a pact on the subject 
of armed neutrality. 

‘In the very centre of this pact stands the proposal 
to fortify the two banks of the Sound, which divides 
Denmark from Sweden and dominates the entrance 
to the Baltic. 

‘This second Dardanelles, which played an impor- 
tant role in the naval operations of 1914718, is to 
be protected by guns with a range. of twenty kilo- 


z metres. o o 


‘The barricading of the Baltic means, in the event 
of a war under the present European political con- 
strictions, that Germany and Poland could attack 
Russia without French naval forces and munitions 
being able to go to the assistance of their ally, the 
Soviet Union. 

‘ While, on the other hand, Germany would be in 
no way inconvenienced, since the Kiel Canal pro- 
vides her with a short and protected access to the 
Baltic. 

‘In brief, this proposed pact between Sweden and 
Denmark to neutralize the Sound would in the event 
of war isolate Russia, while making Germany master 
82 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


of the Baltic. More: it would automatically drive 
the Baltic States into the German front. 

‘This was the real game that Herr von Papen was 
hunting in Sweden—a game much dirtier in its 
habits than the elk. 

‘In view of the presence of Mr. Eden, one cannot 
avoid the suspicion that Britain is also on safan.’* 


A writer in semi-Fascist Finland, named Johannes 
Rautakoura, has published a book called The 
Struggle for World Hegemony, 1935-1950 in which he 
describes the conquest of Siberia by Japan and the 
formation of an alliance between Germany and 
Poland as the proper factors for the realization of a 
Greater Finland. This book met with an enthusi- 
astic reception among the Finnish public. Declara- 
tion of war by Japan against the Soviet Union will 
be takerf by the Finnish Fascists and militarists as the 
signal for their invasion of Soviet Karelia, a province 
that thesé gentlemen claim should be part of 
‘Greater Finland.’ 

While these preparations are being made, the 
German government refuses to enter into an 
‘Eastern Locarno,’ guaranteeing the frontiers of 
Poland and Germany and the Soviet Union, and of 
the smaller States in Eastern Europe. British policy, 
as expressed by The Times, views this refusal with 
equanimity, and even states not without some evi- 
dence of satisfaction that ‘a consequence of the 
London Agreement may be that as a breach is being 
closed in the West, so a breach in the East is being 
widened.’ 

* ‘Atergo,’ in the Sunday Referee, October 28, 1934. 5 

3 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


These diplomatic preparations for war are backed 
up by technical preparations. 


‘Germany is preparing to re-arm—and is re-arming 
—with a concentrated purpose never before known 
in a European country in time of peace. ... While 
all other industries are languishing there is a boom 
in those concerned with the material of war.’ (An 
English resident recently returned from Germany, 
Daily Telegraph, July 13, 1933.) 

‘That the German factories produce fighting and 
bombing machines complete to the point of fitting in 
machine-guns and bombing apparatus is admitted 
by the German air authorities themselves. That 
they construct on a large scale types of fighters and 
scouting planes is equally evident. It is pointed out 
that the H.D.38, H.D.41, and H.D.43 of the Heinkel 
firm are classed as such in British works of reference. 
The military qualities of the Junkers giant aeroplane, 
type G.38, as a bombing ’plane have been justly 
vaunted by the German constructors, and no illusions 
are entertained in France as to its being a bona-fide 
transport plane.’ (The Times, December 10, 1932.) 

‘It is officially estimated that Germany could at 
short notice put into the field an army of 1,000,000 
men, equipped with rifles and machine-guns, but 
without heavy guns, tanks or aeroplanes. And even 
where heavy artillery, aeroplanes and tanks are con- 
cerned, the Germans themselves frankly admit that 
they have not kept to either the spirit or the letter of 
the Peace Treaty.’ (The Times, December 10, 1932.) 


If the German army available in December 1932 
was a million strong, how strong will it be in 1935, 
after two years’ intensive development? 


84 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


Since 1933 the policy of British imperialism has 
been to permit and even encourage this re-armament 
of Germany; therefore we find no more of these 
references to German strength in the London press. 
But from technical journals we can get a good pic- 
ture of the importation of war materials by the 
Nazis. Imports of food and clothes to Germany are 
cut down to the barest minimum, for lack of cash. 
There is no such restriction on war stuffs, as this 


table shows: g 


Imports to Germany 1932 1933 
tons tons 
Iron ans .. 171,000 431,000 
Scrap-iron .. 99,000 348,000 
Nickel ore .. 17,000 34,000 


That this is happening is admitted by the British 
Government; a representative of the Government 
answering a question in the House of Commons, stated : 


‘The total quantity of scrap and old iron . . . im- 
ported for consumption into Germany during the 
first four months of 1933 amounted to 176,732 tons 
compared with 16,216 tons during the corresponding 
period of 1932.’ (Hansard, July 26, 1933). 


The figures for American aircraft exports to Ger- 
many and Holland (whence many go to Germany), 
increased even more rapidly: 


Germany. Holland. 


dollars. dollars. 
19390 ž .. ae 51,000 99,000 
1931 .. én: 2,000 210,000 
1932 .. gs 6,000 130,000 


1933 .. oi 272,000 234,000 
1934 (Jan.-Aug.) 1,445,000 138,000 
85 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


In May 1934, eighty Armstrong-Siddeley engines 
were ordered in Britain. The British Government 
_ gave a permit for their export. 

While war material is thus being imported, 
German heavy industry is also speeded up. The 
increase in heavy industrial production during 1934 
(iron by 66 per cent., crude steel by 50 per cent., 
rolling-mill products by 40 per cent., compared with 
the previous year), can only be explained by a 
feverish increase in the production of artillery, 
machine-guns, tanks, steel reinforcements for 
concrete ‘pill-boxes’ and emplacements, steel 
hangars, lorries, all the equipment of armies and . 
air forces. 

According to official figures, German industrial 
production in 1934 reached a level 50 per cent. or so 
higher than in 1932. But retail trade was only about 
10 per cent. in value (less in quantity) above the 1932 
level. Where has the rest gone? Into the re-equip- 
ment of factories, say the German economists. Into 
war material, say the French newspapers. 

In 1932 the motor industry sold about 40,000 
vehicles. In 1934 the sale was roughly 80,000. But 
the consumption of fuel for motor vehicles decreased. 
The extra vehicles are stored in the army and air 
force depots. 

In Hitler Rearms,* Miss Dorothy Woodman and 
her colleagues of the Union of Democratic Control 
show, from secret documents and from indiscreet 
passages in the German press, that the whole of the 
nation’s life is being forced into the straight-jacket 


* John Lane, London, 1934. 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


of war preparation. She estimates that the trained 
and organized forces of the new mass army were, by 
the middle of 1934, 2,400,000 men. About 2,000,000 
reserves stand behind these.* At the same time an 
enormous increase in aviation is indicated. 

A secret ‘provisional programme’ for the manu- 
facture of military aircraft, which was to have been 
completed by May 1934, is reproduced photo- 
graphically in Hitler Rearms. This comprised 294 
machines, and 660 engines. This was the addition 
being made to an air fleet which already, in the 
spring of 1934, is estimated to have included the 
following : 


‘Civilian’ ’planes, adaptable for war.. 1,000 
Experimental constructions at factories 50 
Military *planes at factories in Italy, 
Sweden, Holland, owned by Germans 300 
Military ‘planes | built sega in Ger- 
many . 400 


Total .. 1,750 


In quoting these estimates we have taken in each 
case the lower figures given. Similar figures have 
been quoted by Seymour Cocks, M.P., in Parliament, 
on February 6, 1934, by the Sunday Referee, and by 
the Sunday Express Berlin correspondent, who ‘re- 
vealed that the German Air Armament programme 
was between 1,700 and 2,100° (machines). 

* Since the above was written, the German government has 
announced its plans for an army of 500,000 men. This only means 
that it has released from the restrictions of secrecy this spear-head of 


the mass army already in being. 
87 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Since that time this air force has probably been 
increased at the rate of over 300 machines a month. 
(It is probable that the ‘provisional programme’ 
reproduced in Hitler Rearms is a programme for a 
month’s deliveries, though this is not stated on the 
document. The rate of delivery would be speeded-up 
as the factories got into their swing.) Normal 
wastage and obsolescence would by May 1935 have 
subtracted from this total perhaps a third of those 
machines available in the spring of 1934. By May 1, 
1935, therefore, the air fleet at the disposal of 
General Goering should be as follows: 


Total of previous table T .. 1,750 
Less wastage 
1,150 
Added by May 1, 1934 250 
Added between May I, 1934 2 and May 
I, 1935 : 3,600 
Total .. 5, 


This is a very rough estimate, and may be much 
too low. The productive capacity of the German 
aeroplane industry in 1918 was about 2,500 machines 
a monih. It may, by the end of 1935, have got back 
nearer to that level. 

These machines are hidden in forest aerodromes 
and in underground hangars. The ‘unemploy- 
ment relief works’ on which millions of marks are 
spent yearly are almost all listed as ‘underground 
works.’ 


88 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


The money for this enormous programme of re- 
armament comes from lowered wages, and increased 
prices. The consequent misery of the population can 
be guessed from an Exchange Telegraph message 
printed in the London press during February 1935. 
This states that the Hamburg municipal gas works 
is spending £230,000 in an attempt to reduce the 
enormous number of people who use gas for the 
purpose of killing themselves. 

The part of the gas that kills is the carbon mon- 
oxide. At present there is 16 per cent. of carbon 
monoxide in the Hamburg municipal gas. Now they 
are to erect a plant to reduce the amount to one-half 
percent. ‘The charge to consumers,’ they announce, 
‘will be the same as at present.’ 

Unemployment, low wages, helplessness, suicides 
—Germany must ‘burst out.’ | 

As we have already shown, the edge of the new 
weapon is turned eastwards—at present. But 
inevitably, from success or stalemate or failure in an 
Eastern war, or possibly from the manceuvres pre- 
liminary to it, will arise a war in the West. It is by 
no means certain that in such a war British imperial- 
ism will be on the side of French imperialism, as 
against Fascist Germany. France has colonies that 
could change hands, Germany has none. ... What- 
ever the alignment, this war will begin with the use 
of air forces against the cities. The British plan of 
‘defence’ is to counter-attack from the air, and also 
to use a new mechanized expeditionary force for 
raiding or forcing back the enemies’ aerodromes, thus 
making their bombing more difficult. 

89 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


The military correspondent of the Daily Telegraph 
stated on October 22, 1934: 


‘An important decision, and re-orientation of aim, 
is indicated by instructions that have, I understand, 
been conveyed from the General Staff. 

‘For several years past the training of the Army at 
home has been based on Colonial warfare, in the 
form of major and minor expeditions. In the 
brigade and divisional exercises the “enemy” has 
commonly been represented as savage tribesmen or 
as the forces of an Asiatic State with a comparatively 
low standard of equipment. 

“Next year the training will be based primarily on 
the ues of hypothetical operations in 
Europe. . 


The same correspondent, Captain Liddell Hart, 
reported on November 15, 1934: 


‘Far-reaching plans for the re-organization of the 
Army and the creation of an up-to-date Expedition- 
ary Force were unfolded by Col. G. N. Macready, 
who is on the staff duties side of the War Office, at 
a lecture at the Royal United Services Institute 
yesterday. . 

‘One important development is the creation of a 
mobile division in place of the old cavalry division. 
Sometimes the division may be used as a whole, 
sometimes as a mobile protective base from which 
the Tank Brigade can be shot out independently. 

‘As forecast in the Daily Telegraph of November 3, 
the mechanized cavalry regiments will be similar to 
the French dragons portés, the men being mounted in 
low-built vehicles carrying a driver, an N.C.O., and 
six men. 


go 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


‘The infantry division, too (as also forecast), is to 
be reorganized on modern lines. It will have all its 
vehicles mechanized, and its proportion of weapons 
to men improved. 

‘The Light Artillery Brigades (using pack or 
draught horses) will be converted into mechanized 
field artillery, and the role of close support to the 
infantry will be taken over by mechanized mortars. 

‘A considerable number of men will be saved in the 
infantry brigade, but this reduction will be offset by 
an increase of 52 light machine-guns per brigade. 
The saving of men will be partly utilized to create 
one Army Tank Battalion for each infantry division. 

‘Adaptability, based on interchangeability of roles, 
is a key-note of the new organization. Thus, the 
mobile division may operate with or without a tank 
brigade. The increased number of army field 
brigades, adopted instead of an increase in the 
divisional artillery, will allow a greater concentra- 
tion of fire on the decisive sector of attack, and more 
possibilities of varying the point of main effort.’ 


By these means the War Office hopes to develop 
a striking force that can land in Northern France, 
Belgium, or Holland, and rush the bases of any hos- 
tile air force within range, while our own air force 
bombs the factories that supply it and the cities that 
control it. | 3 
The outcome of such a war—or series of wars—is 
impossible to foresee. We have already indicated a 
possible death-rate of twenty-five per cent., if the 
bombing of cities goes to its technical limits. Mr. 
Wickham Steed, in the Nineteenth Century, July 1934, 
described German preparations for bacteriological 
gI 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


warfare.* If this form of war is successful, perhaps in 
some areas the population will be reduced to such an 
extent that a complete breakdown of modern eco- 
nomic life—in which food is provided by the inter- 
dependent co-operation of millions of workers—will 
occur, or will only be prevented by intervention from 
areas less injured. It happened once before, at least, 
in history, that the centres of a world civilization 
collapsed from war; the edges of the world, as it was 
then, had to supply the material for rebuilding 
human life. 

But there is no need to envisage that possibility, 
yet, as even likely. For from the first World War, and 
its shattering effect on the brittle tyranny of Tsar- 
ism, came the first working-class revolution. From 
the second World War, what is more probable than 
a Soviet Germany? 

Ernst Thaelmann, leader of the Communist Party 
of Germany, is in prison. But the Hamburg insur- 
rection, that Thaelmann led in 1923, is alive in the 
minds of thousands of German workers. They 
remember how, on the night of October 23 the 
fighters gathered at the previously appointed places. 
The total number who gathered was not more than 


*“Mr. Wickham Steed quotes from secret documents which have 
come into his possession, from which it appears that the experiments 
were made with a harmless germ easily identified. ... The results at 
specified places in Paris and in London (at Leicester Square, Totten- 
ham Court Road, and especially Piccadilly Circus and Liverpool 
Street) show effects which would greatly assist gas attacks by airmen. 

‘These experiments, according to the documents quoted, have been 
compared with similar ones made secretly in Germany. Of particular 
interest is the interpretation of a German cypher report on tests made 
in Paris last August when the Place de la Concorde and other spots 
were sprayed with germs.’ (Daily Telegraph, June 28, 1934.) 


92 


GOERING’S BOMBERS 


goo. They were divided into twenty shock groups, 
of which each received a task of capturing one police 
station. Each of these groups received two revolvers 
or one rifle and one revolver. 

Exactly at the appointed time, at 5 o’clock in the 
morning, an attack was made on twenty police sta- 
tions in the northern proletarian districts of Ham- 
burg. The result of the first blow was that in half an 
hour seventeen police stations were occupied by the 
fighters. They proved to be masters of the situation 
in Barmbeck, Eimsbuttel and Schiffbeck. 

Workers remember how those men fought and held 
their positions, and only gave up their fight when it 
was clear that there would be no movement in the 
rest of Germany. This was an ‘Easter week,’ a small- 
scale 1905. It was the testing, the proving, of the 
men who—a few in prison, a few in exile, the majority 
working secretly in Germany—will lead a people’s 
revolution to power. 

That revolution was impossible while the Social- 
Democratic leaders of Germany held the majority of 
the working class behind them, kept them from 
action, led them to ‘vote for Hindenburg to keep 
Hitler out.” Now Hitler, put in power by Hinden- 
burg, has broken the German Social-Democratic 
party to pieces. He has therefore released the 
majority of the German working class from a force 
that shackled them. 

A Communist Germany, ‘infinitely formidable,’ in 
Lloyd George’s words, would face aggressive capital- 
ist Powers determined to crush it. But even if cities 
were ruined, factories destroyed, armies and air 


93 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


forces split and disorganized, such a Germany could 
resist all attacks. Because it could speak to the 
peoples of France and Britain irresistibly; because 
it would have as allies everything alive, conscious, in 
the working classes of these countries. 

That also will be part of the indestructible power of 
the Soviet Union, if Nazi Germany, backed by Britain, 
marches east. It is for this war within minds, as well 
as for the war by bombs and shells, that preparations 
are being made. 


CHAPTER V 
BE PREPARED! 


Ir this is the sort of war that is likely, how shall we 
prepare for it? 

That is the question that governments and those 
who control governments are asking. It even 
troubles the peaceful routine of Whitehall, and 
forces the War Office to spend ten years considering 
whether gas-masks can be given to civilians.* It 
leads the French government (according to a Times 
report, August 1, 1934) to study the ‘dispersion’ of 
the population of Paris and other cities. And the 
French have also invested in a brand-new steel and 
concrete frontier, defences dug deep into the hills and 
equipped for a whole army’s occupation. Where 
this question has led the German government we 
have already seen, in part. 

The most important war preparations for the 
readers of this book, and possibly the more important 
for the world as a whole, are those being made by 
the British capitalist class. We will note some aspects 
of these preparations, technical and ‘moral.’ But 
before doing so, we return for a page to our previous 
thesis : that the new Serajevo is likely to be found in 


* Has the argument been raised, during these discussions, that if 
workers are given gas-masks they cannot effectively be gassed in the 
interests of ‘law and order’? 

95 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Manchuria or Mongolia, and the World War will 
start there. The preparations that have been made 
by the Japanese, for this eventuality, are very con- 
siderable. 

To give an example we quote from the Daily 
Telegraph, whose Manchurian correspondent writes: 


‘An investigation which I have made into Man- 
chukuo’s strategic railway construction reveals aston- 
ishing achievements under enormously difficult 
conditions. 

‘The programme has brought Japan into a 
strikingly favourable position to meet any military 
developments which might in the future be under- 
taken by Soviet Russia. 

‘Before 1931 the total mileage of railways in Man- 
chukuo—then Manchuria—was 3,715. This in- 
cluded: South Manchuria system, 693 miles; the 
Chinese Eastern, 1,075; Chinese lines, 1,660; and 
light railways, 287. 

‘The present admitted mileage is 4,644, an increase 
of 929. I am reliably informed, however, that rail- 
ways which are listed as “‘under construction” are in 
reality almost completed, and add 1,031—or a 
revealed total of 5,665 miles. 

‘This means that Manchukuo has constructed 
within two years about 2,000 miles of railway. The 
building commenced in the spring of 1932. 

‘The new lines will enable Japan to place troops 
rapidly in any part of Manchukuo or Mongolia. 
Eleven distinct railway systems are admitted, but I 
learn that an additional line is nearing completion 
in East Manchukuo. . 

‘It is only fair to state ‘that these railways also dove- 
96. 


BE PREPARED 


tail with the Manchukuo Government’s economic 
development, which is generally stressed.’ (Daily 
Telegraph, December 21, 1934.) 


At the same time, and presumably for the same 
reasons of ‘economic development,’ an increase in 
air lines and aerodromes is reported. The Aeroplane 
states that early in 1934 there were over 2,400 miles 
of air line in operation, with thirty-nine aerodromes, 
nine of which were near Mukden. Many of the air 
lines were ‘for government use, and ordinary travel- 
lers have to get special permits to use them.’ Eco- 
nomic, perhaps. 

Equally open preparations for war are taking 
place in many other parts of the world. But no- 
where so rapidly, or on so large a scale as compared 
with the nation’s resources. Japan has reached the 
stage of spending almost half the total state budget 
on her war forces. 

According to a Reuter message printed in the 
London press on December 23, 1934, the draft 
Budget for 1935 totals £ 128,860,000 at present rates 
of exchange. Of this the Navy takes nearly 
£31,130,000, and the Army £28,840,000. Nearly 
£60 million out of less than £130 million goes on 
war preparations. Reuter’s Tokyo correspondent 
comments : 


‘Comparison of the 1935-36 Budget figures with 
those of the current and preceding financial years 
reveals that military expenses have increased for the 
fifth successive year. Whereas the total Budget out- 
lay has increased since the 1930-31 Budget by about 


G 97 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


37 per cent., the portion devoted to military ex- 
penses has grown by 1930 per cent. From being 27 
per cent. of the total, the military portion has become 
46.6 per cent.’ 


No other Power can rival these percentages, 
though several Powers, Britain included, spend more 
than the Japanese. They have far more to spend. 
The crushing weight of these war expenditures on 
Japan’s rickety economy is one of the reasons why 
the Japanese must fight soon; they cannot afford to 
wait. l 
It is not necessary to survey here the official 
figures for the world’s expenditure on armaments, 
an expenditure that has increased steadily since the 
Disarmament Conference began to sit. The figures 
are available in a dozen pamphlets, are repeated 
continually in newspaper articles, are the theme of 
speeches that always, in all countries, amount to 
this: we had begun to disarm, had almost disarmed, 
had pushed disarmament to the limit of risk, are 
willing to disarm, have proved our willingness— 
but . .. And the ‘but’ is directed against the 
foreigner, the dangerous and aggressive foreigner 
who spoils our plans for disarmament. So Britain, 
so America, so—with variations about ‘security’ or 
‘equality’—France and Germany and Japan. Some 
of these speeches go on to pacifist conclusions ; others 
lead towards ‘we must rearm to be safe.’ 

The figures for expenditure on armaments mean 
much and yet mean little. There is money spent on 
giant battleships (particularly now in the U.S.A.) 
that is fairly clearly just graft on the grand scale, 


98 


BE PREPARED 


robbery by the steel trusts. For these machines were 
conclusively proved obsolete when U.S. aeroplanes 
dropped four 2,000 lb. bombs alongside the ex- 
German dreadnought Ostfriesland. By the time the 
fourth bomb had been dropped the stern was under 
water; in g minutes she sank.* When a direct hit 
with a 1,100 lb. bomb was scored on the obsolete 
U.S. battleship Virginia, it was a total wreck in a few 
seconds. The New Jersey, treated to a similar bomb, 
promptly turned bottom up.f It is clear that the 
proposal to build more vessels such as these can only 
come from ‘Noahs’ and from steel firms. 

While there is much waste of this and other sorts 
to be counted off the figures for effective war 
expenditure, there are many expenses that never find 
their right places in the Budgets. Subsidies to civil 
aviation, subsidies for beet and meat and wheat, 
hordes of employees and millions of money employed 
to organize food reserves, or to train pilots, or to 
produce petrol from coal. Special tariffs protect war 
industries: dyes, artificial silks, nitrogenous manures 
are no good for war, in themselves—but the factories 
that make them can make poison gases or explosives. 
These should all be reckoned among the expenses on 
war preparations. 


* See Rear-Admiral Murray F. Sueter, Airmen or Noahs, London, 
1928, p. 74 and subsequent pages; especially the convincing photo- 
graphs opposite p. 75. aa 

t Since this page was written the rebellion in Greece has occurred. 
Aeroplanes were used to bomb a navy in revolt, and did little 
damage. There are those who argue from this that the air weapon 
is not effective. But the Greek government did not want to sink its 
only warships; the weapon was effective enough to bring the rebel 
fleet to surrender in a 

99 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


War preparations are territorial as well as tech- 
nical. Since one of the great prizes of the next World 
War will—according to the hopes of bankers and 
traders—be control of the Chinese market, British 
and Americans and Japanese widen their footholds 
there by trade, education, religion, and adventure. 

‘The educational work done by foreigners in 
China looks like charity, but is in reality a form of 
colonization,’ stated a manifesto of the national asso- 
ciation of Provincial Educational Associations of 
China in 1924. ‘Most foreigners who are doing 
educational work in China usually have as their 
purpose either religious propaganda or political 
aggression. Education is simply a supplementary 
matter to them.’ The English and Americans use 
education to the full. And religion: there are less 
than 130,000 Protestants in China, but missionaries 
distribute—according to a League of Nations jour- 
nalist—ten million Bibles every year.* As in Africa, 
the Bible breaks ground for the trader, and behind 
the trader is the gunboat. The Japanese are ham- 
pered by their not being Christians, but they are 
‘very well informed about all the doings of the 
bandits, because they pay for them. They are even 
able at times to publish the news (of a bandit raid) 
in advance.’ f 

Mongolia is full of Japanese expeditions, Japanese 
advisers to the local chiefs. Round half the circum- 
ference of China, which contains a fifth of the 


* Wiliam Martin, sometime foreign editor of the Journal de 
Geneve, in ‘Understand the Chinese,’ London, 1934. 
d. 


BE PREPARED 


population of the globe, and far inland, a struggle 
goes on between the imperialisms for influence, for 
the ownership of railways and war-lords, of mines 
and politicians. It is difficult tó estimate which . 
fo. m of investment is more profitable. < Ft 1$ impas-:" 
sible often to say who or what has-been: bought, or. - 


blackmailed into acquiescence, by ‘each Powet.: “But ~>. 


it is easy to see that all these moves are war moves. 
Typical of a dozen adventure stories is this quota- 
tion from the Daily Telegraph of August 4, 1934: 


Collapse of Londoner’s ‘Kingdom.’ 
Dr. Sheldrake in Flight. 


‘Mystery surrounds the whereabouts of Dr. Khalid 
Sheldrake, the London-born Moslem, who was 
elected “King of Islamistan” to rule over 15,000,000 
Moslems in Sinkiang, on the borders of China and 
Afghanistan. 

‘According to reports from Tihua, states the 
B.U.P., Sinkiang Government troops have routed his 
forces and overthrown the insurgent government, set 
up at Khotien, in Southern Sinkiang, which had 
offered him the throne. 

‘One report states that Dr. Sheldrake, who is 
president of the Islamic Society, has gone to India. 

“Recently his wife, Mrs. Ghazie Sybil Sheldrake, 
was living in Gaynesford Road, Forest Hill, London, 
with her two sons. The latter were to have been 
princes in the new State.’ 


It is not often that a paper so sage as the Daily 
Telegraph pretends to be so stupid. ‘Gone to India’! 
Where else could the poor man run? That is where 
he came from, And he did not raise the money for 

IOI 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


his venture by the subscriptions of his neighbours in 
a lower middle-class little side-street in Forest Hill, 
S.E. 23. But perhaps even Mr. Sheldrake does not 
p know the.source of the finances behind him. 

: While- the great Powers chip pieces off China— 


ae treading. firmly .on each other’s toes whenever pos- 
“.: siblé-—theré afe some other smaller ‘open spaces’ in 


the world, as tempting prospective properties as any 
village common in the days of enclosures. There is 
Abyssinia, the one bit of Africa not swallowed by the 
European empires and their agents. Here, Italian 
troops are said to be a hundred miles within the 
borders. Little battles are reported. The Japanese 
make a surprise appearance in the news, building 
aerodromes in Abyssinia. ... In what Budget can 
we find the expenditures involved? 

All these preparations for war cost a deal of cash, 
which does not often have any reflection in pub- 
lished accounts. Even Chinese bandits need some 
pay; English ones need quite high wages. For good 
historical reasons the British capitalist class are better 
equipped than most others for many of these forms — 
of not quite official war preparations. As a class, it 
has held power and gathered riches for a relatively 
long time, and since England was the only ‘workshop 
of the world’ for a large part of this time, it ‘did 
things on its own’ without the need for government 
control or initiation. The habit remains. When 
Greenland becomes interesting, strategically, because 
of its value to navies and air forces moving from 
Britain ‘to protect Canada,’ a university sends an 
expedition, or a group of young men from a uni- 
102 


BE PREPARED 


versity form one. When the Soviet areas of China 
have to be reckoned with, The Times can be relied on 
to send a very able correspondent, who will be the 
first European to make his way round them.* Be- 
sides the rich newspapers, geographical associations, 
museums, universities, etc., that can pay for investiga- 
tions, there are millionaires of a very useful sort. 
The British ruling class has a firm but adaptable 
science of government, and knows how to assimilate 
almost all the rich men and women who rise into it 
from industry or trade. These men and women 
seldom found peace prizes or leave their money to 
libraries; they have been helped to shed any petty- 
bourgeois ideas belonging to their past. Lord Wake- 
field or Lady Houston can be relied on not to waste 
their resources, but to finance flights that “blaze a 
trail,’ or help the aircraft industry in some other way. 

In technical matters slightly different processes go 
on. British technique has fallen behind American 
and German during the past thirty years. America 
led in the petrol-engine technique, Germany in the 
electrical and chemical. But in quality of product 
great efforts have been made in Britain to keep 
ahead. The laboratory equipment of British indus- 
try is far behind that of Germany or the U.S.A., but 
the skilled workmanship that results from genera- 
tions of industrial civilization makes possible the 
Rolls-Royce type of product. This, considered in- 
dustrially, is an unimportant luxury class of goods. 
Considered technically, it is of much greater impor- 
tance: it leads to the Rolls-Royce aero-engine, for 


* Peter Fleming, One’s Company, London, 1934. 
103 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


several years the most efficient engine in the world 
for high-speed aeroplanes. 

Similarly the productive technique of Sheffield is 
less progressive than that of Essen or of Bethlehem, 
U.S.A. But the concentrated work done at Sheffield 
to produce steels, for various purposes, of the highest 
possible qualities, has had great results. Sir Robert 
Hadfield, mainly responsible for these special steels, 
made modern war possible as much as any other 
single man. 

This aspect of British war preparations—the drive 
for quality—is the reason why the decision to increase 
the size of the Royal Air Force very rapidly, taken 
in 1934, is the most important measure of technical 
preparation for war that can be observed in the 
world to-day. It is more important than the parallel 
German effort because it means the organisation of 
larger productive forces. 

Ever since the first World War, the British capitalist 
class was content with an air force relatively tiny in 
size compared with the rival forces (even though, 
before its present expansion, it was more powerful 
than the Flying Corps of January 1918). But this air 
_ force was kept at a fairly high level of performance 
and quality. 

Performance is of outstanding importance in air 
war. Two slow machine-guns, on the ground, can 
more than counter in effect one that fires more 
rapidly. But two slow aeroplanes are no use at all 
against one fast one. 

Aeroplanes last a very short time when on active 
service; many aeroplane engines during 1915-18 
104 


BE PREPARED 


were only of use for about six weeks. Modern 
machines are of stronger material, but have to 
endure greater stresses; they will crack up almost as 
quickly. | 

Because of these two technical factors in this new 
force in warfare, the capacity to produce aeroplanes 
and the quality of the “planes produced are of 
primary importance. Because of the rapidity with 
which aeroplane technique advances, machines are 
obsolescent within a few years. 

The decision to increase the air force rapidly 
means first of all that the British capactty to make 
*planes is being greatly increased during 1935 and 
1936. | 

Britain’s eventual capacity to produce vast quan- 
tities of these machines is higher than that of any 
other capitalist country, except that of the United 
States. Almost every factory in Britain which in 
1918 was producing aeroplanes and aero-engines 
still exists. Many of these factories have been turned 
over to other purposes. But these could be rapidly 
re-equipped and reorganized for air work; the plans 
for such a change-over are ready, and the Air 
Ministry continually inspects all factories on its lists 
to note what changes have been made and therefore 
what alterations in these plans are needed. 

Many of the factories which in 1918 were small 
concerns, and old-fashioned, are to-day big modern 
plants. For instance, the Wolseley motor works 
made ‘Raf’ engines during the war, by methods 
that would now be considered primitive. To-day 
these motor works are part of the Morris combine ; 

105 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Sir William Morris (now Lord Nuffield) has re- 
organized them for ‘flow’ production, and made it 
possible for them to turn out perhaps ten times as 
much in aero-engine horse-power as could be done 
during the war. In 1919 this firm ceased to make 
aero-engines ; in 1934 it began to do so again. 

An aeroplane is a complex mechanism of many 
parts. The metal portions contain not only steel and 
aluminium, but wolfram, tungsten, vanadium, chro- 
mium, nickel, manganese, copper, zinc, tin and anti- 
mony. For wings and framework cotton and linen 
of fine quality are needed, and also cellulose acetate 
and nitrate, acetones, ketones, glue, casein products, 
cement and rubber. The industries supplying and 
shaping these things will all be stimulated and if 
necessary extended to deal with the orders for new 
aircraft. These industries will be made ready to 
meet the strain of war. 

That is the position in regard to productive 
capacity. What of quality? Here a technical 
peculiarity of this type of work comes in. 

The first experimental models of a new type of 
aeroplane are ‘tool-room jobs.” Which means that 
each individual part of the framework is drilled or 
cut or rolled or pressed or welded by hand, or by 
machines on which hours (sometimes days) have to 
be spent in ‘setting up’ the working tools to make 
exactly the right shapes and sizes. When erecting the 
first models of a new type of aeroplane, the fitters and 
riggers have to work slowly, adjusting and filing, 
getting each angle, each point of contact between 
parts, correct according to the blue-prints. 

106 


BE PREPARED 


Continually the erecting-shop will be referring. 
back to the drawing-office for further explanations 
and calculations. The process of working out a new 
type and taking it through all its tests is a slow 
and costly one. Sometimes it lasts, up to the first 
production order, as long as eighteen to thirty 
months. 

But when at last a new type goes into production 
there is a great change. ‘Jigs’ of wood or metal are 
set up to give the position and correlation of parts: 
all the erector has to do is to see that the parts fit into 
their right positions in the jigs; blue-prints no longer 
worry him. Gauges cut exactly to size from solid 
metal replace the adjustable micrometer gauges, and 
save hours each day in the continual checking of 
sizes (which have to be correct to a thousandth part 
of an inch, or even in some parts of the engines to a 
matter of some ten-thousandths). Moulds for the 
forgings, fixed settings for the automatic lathes and 
boring machines, are standardized. Production can 
then get ahead as fast as the workers employed are 
prepared to go. 

The decision to increase the air force rapidly will 
mean that practically every aircraft factory in the 
British Isles will be fully equipped with the gauges, 
the jigs, the whole equipment for making aeroplanes 
wholesale. And modern aeroplanes are much more 
capable of mass production than those of 1918. Steel 
has replaced spruce, complicated frames have 
become simple structures of metal tubes, no more 
difficult to make quickly than bicycles. 

Trained men are available to use these flow-pro- 

107 


asiy 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


duced machines. The editor of the Aeroplane wrote 
in 1934: 


‘The short service system, plus the newer system of 
bringing men into the Reserve of Air Force Officers 
direct without putting them through a short-service 
commission, has built up a very big reserve of well- 
trained officers who . . . would provide us in a few 
weeks with a fighting force which would probably 
entirely alter our place in the scale of Air Power. 

‘The number of officer-pilots and N.C.O.-pilots on 
the Reserve has never been published. Possibly the 
powers-that-be do not wish it to be known... . 
We have also an enormous reserve of mechanics 
because of the number who retire year by year. 

‘Naturally such quantities of pilots and mechanics 
would be of no use without aeroplanes and arma- 
ment. Here again we are not so badly off, because 
. .. the various heads of technical departments have 
held fairly consistently to a policy of only accepting 
designs which can be put into mass-production on 
the outbreak of war. 

‘Some designs which are terribly expensive when 
made in dozens are such that similar aeroplanes 
could be turned out like sausages by chopping up 
and sticking together steel strips.’ (Aeroplane, Feb- 


ruary 14, 1934.) 
That is, then, a main point of policy; ability to 
turn out aeroplanes ‘like sausages,’ and to man them. 


: A minor point is to have a large and increasing stock 
` of engines on hand, because engines take longer to 


make than aeroplanes. In the increased Air Esti- 
mates of 1934 the largest proportionate increase of 
all was that in the vote for engines and engine spares. 
108 


BE PREPARED 


The Aeroplane commented on this disproportion: 
‘this is odd, because the R.A.F. has masses of com- 
paratively modern motors in store’ (March 7, 1934). 
It is not ‘odd’ at all, if there is to be production of 
*planes, soon, ‘like sausages.’ 

If machines ‘can be put into mass-production at 
the outbreak of war,’ why build up a stronger force 
now, a stock of machines that will soon be obsolete? 
The only reason possible is that these machines are 
likely to be needed before obsolescence. 

A fighter or bomber that is ten miles an kont too 
slow has a ten to one chance against it. At Hendon 
in June 1931, the ‘star’ exhibit was a ‘Fury’ fighter. 
At Hendon in 1933, a ‘Super-Fury’ appeared. At 
Hendon in June 1934, a ‘modified Fury,’ with a new 
type of engine, was shown which because of its added 
speed, climb and power of manceuvre made the 
older machine obsolete. In 1931 the original ‘Fury’ 
was still experimental; in 1932 and 1933 squadrons 
were equipped with it, in 1934 it was easily surpassed 
not only by its faster namesake, but also by at least 
two of the new ‘day-and-night fighters’ also on view: 
the Supermarine (developed from the Schneider 
Trophy winners) and the Hawker ‘P.V.’ (‘private 
venture’). 

In 1932 three experimental night-bombers were 
seen at Hendon. One, the Handley-Page machine 
(then unnamed), was put into production and 
squadrons were equipped with it in 1933-34. At 
Hendon in 1934 a ‘second edition’ of this machine 
appeared, the Handley-Page ‘Heyford’ Mark II. 
‘The speed of this latest version has been consider- 


109 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


ably increased by certain improvements.’ (Aeroplane, 
June 27, 1934.) 

This inescapable process of rapid change makes it 
sheer folly to build a large number of machines, that 
will be technically out of date soon after their pilots 
know them—unless war 1s expected within a few months 
or years. 

If war is really near, at most a matter of eighteen 
months off, the new machines that were ordered in 
the autumn of 1934, and are being produced now 
(February 1935), may be of some use, though obso- 
lescent towards the latter part of this period. But an 
important technical point is that the majority of the 
jigs and gauges, moulds, press matrices, etc., which 
allow of machines being turned out ‘like sausages,’ 
hold good for the life of the type and not for the life 
of the model. The majority are as good for the 
Handley-Page ‘Heyford’ Mark III, that is doubtless 
under test now, as for the Mark I that is already 
obsolescent. Therefore the decision to increase the 
air force rapidly, which will give the factories orders 
for perhaps three to four times the number of ’planes 
normally supplied, does not mean that the British 
capitalist class is risking its money on war within 
twelve or eighteen months; it means that it expects 
this war within the lifetime of the types that are now 
standard, including developments of these types— 
perhaps another three years in all. Meanwhile the 
normal process of designing and testing newer types 
will be continued and speeded-up. 

The decision to make this increase, therefore, 
means that war from the air, on a scale never before 
110 


BE PREPARED 


contemplated, is being planned, and thought prob- 
able, by the British ruling class within the years 
1935-38. 

War from the air is not only a question of aero- 
planes : there is also necessary a rapid reorganization 
and improvement in the supply of explosives for use 
in such war. In October 1934 the British railway 
companies circulated their usual list of additions to 
their ‘standard classification of goods list, on which 
their charges are based. It contained fifteen addi- 
tions: eight were the following, all added to the 
‘Dangerous Goods classification’ : 


Butane. 

Giant Dix Amorces. 

Nobel Nitrocellulose Powder No. 1. 
Nobel Superim Powder. 

Nobel’s Explosive No. 695a. 

Nobel’s Explosive No. 704a. 

Polar Saxonite No. 2. 

Smokeless Diamond Powder No. 2. 
Tracers (third and fourth definitions). 


Fuel for the war from the air, petrol from coal, is 
also being produced under government supervision 
and with government help. 

The decision to make these preparations for war 
from the air in the near future was ‘put over’ 
by a press campaign almost on a level with the cam- 
paigns of the war period, and certainly stronger 
than the agitation for more battleships (‘We want 
eight and we won’t wait’) that helped the Liberal 
Government of 1906-14 to get ready for the crush- 

III 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


ing of Britain’s commercial rival, the German 
Empire. 

Lord Rothermere, owner of the Daily Mail, the 
London Evening News, and many provincial papers, 
clamoured for 5,000 more aeroplanes. He was sup- 
ported by Lord Beaverbrook, owner of the Daily 
Express and the Evening Standard. 

Lord Astor’s paper, the Sunday Observer, which 
aims at convincing the ‘professional classes,’ income- 
tax payers, etc., said: ‘We require not another 
hundred machines, but a thousand. We need a 
hundred squadrons—something more than double 
our existing strength.’ This was from the pen of 
J. L. Garvin, ex-supporter of the League of Nations 
(which he has more recently termed a ‘derelict 
institution’). 

The exponents of a stronger air force, from the 
millionaire coal-owner (Mr. Ramsay MacDonald’s 
personal friend) who is head of the Air Ministry to 
the millionaire newspaper-owners who make ‘public 
opinion’ (both for the masses and for the ‘intelligent’ 
middle class) all say that their only aim is to provide 
secure defence for Britain. 

That is a lie. An air force cannot defend. 
And the British Air Force is not designed for 
defence. 

To prove that an air force cannot defend London, 
or any other great city, from modern air attacks, we 
need only quote from The Times and from the 
Aeroplane. 

The Times aeronautical correspondent wrote on 
November 14, 1931: 

112 


BE PREPARED 


“The intention that these fighters (defending Lon- 
don) some 30 miles an hour faster than the best 
bombers in the world, should intercept raiders 
between the coast and London was not fulfilled 
during the Exercises.’ (The exercises referred to are 
the full-scale air manœuvres of July 1931, the last 
real test of London’s defences.) 


During these exercises, according to the official 
report (The Times, July 24, 1931) the number of 
daylight raids that ‘penetrated the defences’ was 
twenty-four; in the dark sixty-eight bombers got 
through. ‘It has never been held,’ wrote The Times 
correspondent, ‘that London could be made secure 
against air attack at a reasonable cost’ (July 24, 
1931). ‘The odds must always be against the 
fighters (defending London) so long as they are 
denied a heavy numerical superiority’ (July 18, 
1931). 

During the 1930 Air Exercises, states the Aeroplane 
(July 22, 1931), ‘the very slowest of our long-range 
bombers succeeded by good navigation and by guile 
in outwitting the fastest and best of our fighters on 
more than one occasion.’ 

In reference to the 1931 Air Exercises the Aeroplane 
wrote: 


‘In considering the problems of the defence of Lon- 
don one has to realize that aircraft are characteristically 
stronger in attack than in defence, and the defenders 
have to protect a vertical front of about five miles 
in addition -to the horizontal front. An enemy must be 
destroyed or disabled before he leaves his base if his efforts 

H 


113 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


are to be averted with any reasonable hopes of suc- 
cess.’ (July 29, 1931.) 

That is the technical and strategical nature of this 
weapon; it cannot defend; it can only be an expe- 
ditionary force. That is why Mr. Baldwin made his 
famous remark that ‘our frontiers are now on the 
Rhine,’ and why Major-General Sir C. W. Gwynn 
wrote : 


‘Our strategic frontier for Home Defence owing to 
the air threat lies not on the coast, but in the hinter- 
land of Western Europe. For that frontier we must 
be prepared to fight.’ (Morning Post, July 12, 1934.) 


This is the crowning absurdity of the ‘Home De- 
fence’ camouflage: the ‘strategic frontier’ for Lon- 
don’s defence is now in the Ruhr; the ‘strategic 
frontier’ for the defence of the Ruhr runs through 
Windsor and Versailles! But the ludicrous nature 
of the plea must not obscure for us the nature of 
Major-General Gwynn’s order to us all; we must be 
prepared to fight for the strategic frontier—because 
otherwise, in Mr. Baldwin’s words, ‘no power on 
earth can protect us...’ 

Major-General Gwynn is not the usual type of 
Morning Post ‘dug-out.’ He has been Commandant 
of the Staff College, Camberley ; a position once held 
by Sir Henry Wilson, Chief of the Imperial General 
Staff in 1918. His ‘we must be prepared’ is a state- 
ment not of desire but of fact; British imperialism 
is preparing to use its new expeditionary air and 
ground forces to win and hold a frontier ‘in the 
hinterland of Western Europe.’ | 


114 


BE PREPARED 


The enemy against whom this frontier must be 
held is, perhaps, Nazi Germany—or Soviet Germany. 
These words, and the air force behind them, and 
the international agreements now being negotiated, 
the ‘Air Pact,’ are intended to form a wall on 


Germany’s western frontier, forcing her to look and 
move eastward. 


115 


CHAPTER VI 
THEY SPEAK PEACE 


Tue moral is to the physical as three to one, in 
warfare. This is still as true as when Napoleon said 
it. But the scale grows with the change in war. The 
morale of the fighting troops used to matter most ; now 
the whole population is included in the ‘nation at 
war.’ Therefore for this new sort of war new 
methods of propaganda have to be evolved, and old 
ones strengthened. 

In one of the early editions of a London evening 
paper—an edition that is two-thirds racing—an 
incautious paragraph is printed about the strength- © 
ening of defences at Hong Kong, Britain’s advanced 
base in the Pacific. It disappears from the later 
editions. Why? In a private and confidential 
memorandum to news editors the Director of Naval 
Intelligence at the Admiralty requests . . . etcetera. 
There is no censorship in Britain, but there are 
official secrets. And there is alertness ; action is taken 
quickly. Particularly quickly if a newspaper refers to 
the defences of Hong Kong, because Article 19 of 
the Washington Naval Treaty (still in force; it does 
not expire till 1936) says ‘the status quo at the time of 
the signing of the present Treaty, with regard to 
fortifications and naval bases, shall be maintained 
in... (2) Hong Kong and the insular possessions 
116 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


which the British Empire now holds or may here- 
after acquire in the Pacific Ocean...’ 

The British censorship is officially non-existent. 
But its power is enormous. How can a newspaper 
hope to compete with its rivals, if it cannot get news 
from government departments? A ‘juicy’ murder 
case, an even more luscious Royal Wedding or 
Jubilee, is without savour if you have no ‘inside 
information’ to give. Therefore newspapers behave. 
To hesitate a doubt about the honesty of a ruling 
politician, to hint at the financial corruption that 
goes hand-in-hand with war business, is to risk 
prosecution for criminal libel. Worse, it might offend 
advertisers, by whose bounty newspapers live. The 
laws of ordinary libel can be pressed to limits almost 
incomprehensible, when the holier instruments of 
propaganda are concerned. A singer employed by 
the British Broadcasting Corporation was criticized, 
during 1934, on purely esthetic criteria; it was 
suggested that this singer allowed undue aspiration 
to occur at the beginning of certain words, ‘an 
intrusive h.’ Heavy damages were given for this 
libellous suggestion. 

In these and other ways judicious silence is 
enforced on the newspapers, in regard to certain 
topics, including those that could even indirectly 
affect the prestige of our institutions. And the native 
populations of the war bases in the colonies are pro- 
tected from ‘dangerous thoughts’ by laws passed to 
stop the importation of ‘obscene literature,’ or by 
police powers that the Tsar’s agents might have 
envied. Law matters little, in this matter; the 


117 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


police twist the law to their purpose. In Australia a 
law exists that visitors who cannot read can be 
refused entry. A Czecho-Slovakian journalist who 
can read most European languages lands in Aus- 
tralia to take part in an Anti-War conference. He is 
tested under this law by police officials, who ask him 
to take down dictation—in Gaelic! He has to appeal 
to a High Court to get this set aside—and is then 
jailed for something else. 

In Britain the laws against the expression of 
political opinion have been made far more drastic 
than they were under the infamous ‘Six Acts’ of 
Castlereagh. 

But all this is only one side of the medal; because 
this side is carefully kept in the dark the other side 
shines with added glory. The volume of war propa- 
ganda now poured out, almost all in indirect forms, 
has never been equalled. ‘Nation shall speak peace 
unto nation’ is the motto of the British Broadcasting 
Corporation, the latest marvel of technique applied to 
propaganda; but when by mistake an honest scientist, 
Professor J. B. S. Haldane, is asked to contribute 
to the talks on ‘the causes of war,’ he is prevented 
from doing so. Mr. Churchill was not prevented. 

It is one of the more considerable tragedies of our 
present civilization that teachers who really believe 
in elementary education, and printers and engineers 
who have given their lives to the intricate efficiency 
of rotary presses, have by their work made it possible 
for the millionaires who own the press to infect us 
with a continual slow poisoning of war propaganda 
that soaks right inside the skin. 

118 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


The film helps: ‘Cavalcade’ is an ‘epic of our 
national life,’ according to the advertisements. In 
‘The Private Life of Henry VIII’ this congenial king 
explains how hard he is working to keep the peace 
in Europe. Jack Hulbert performs prodigies in naval 
submarines or war-time aeroplanes; Cicely Court- 
neidge puts across ‘There’s Something About a 
Soldier.’ 

Sections of the intelligentsia play their part, 
writing war novels full of hopelessness, but most 
hopeless of all about any way of resisting war, writing 
political books and articles ‘against war’ that help, 
as we shall see later, those who are preparing war. 

The controllers of the armed forces themselves 
know the value of propaganda: tattoos, air dis- 
plays, navy weeks—there is no end to it. These few 
paragraphs on war propaganda could be expanded 
to a book. 

What is the content, the argument in this propa- 
ganda? It has two aspects: the nationalist and the 
pacifist. The nationalist aspect is a variant of the 
line well stated by the writers of the Psalms, who 
asked ‘Why do the heathen so furiously rage to- 
gether?’ and answered, ‘The kings of the earth 
stand up and the rulers take counsel together against 
the Lord and against His Anointed.’ This question 
and answer is still the basis of the attitude of half- 
educated clergymen, of part of the popular press, 
the moderately literate majority of members of Par- 
liament, the ‘officer class,’ and the millions deluded 
into following these people in their beliefs. 

Note first the shape of the question: ‘Why do the 


IIQ 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


heathen . . .?’ We are not heathen. It is not a 
question about ourselves as well as other people. It 
is a question about other people, strangers, foreigners, 
those who do not worship our God. (We do not 
rage; we are not war-like; we are never the aggres- 
sors.) Note next the shape of the answer: ‘The kings 
of the earth...’ It is usually difficult to persuade 
the ordinary man that the whole enemy population 
is vile and abhorrent. It is much easier to persuade 
him that a foreign leader, a type, a representative, 
Kaiser or Dictator or General, is a monster of 
inhumanity. The worst crime of this enemy leader 
is that he stands up ‘against the Lord and against 
His Anointed.’ He does not accept our God, our 
King, our Government. 

This simple theory is the theme of ninety per cent. 
of all effective propaganda during a war. Robbed of 
the power given it by continual repetition on an 
immense scale, the hypnotic pressure of press, pulpit, 
platform, this theory can be seen to be ludicrous and 
a lie. But when a war has broken out this first great 
lie about war grows to mountainous solidity: ‘my 
dear, my cousin in Belgium saw with her own eyes the 
babies that a German General...’ It affects not 
only the credulous ; those who have opposed our own 
imperialism and seen through the patriotic myth that 
Britain is always right, those who have, in Mr. 
Chesterton’s words, divided hearts ‘torn apart by 
mother earth and fatherland’*—they also fall vic- 


* See ‘Blessed are the Peacemakers.’ In this poem Mr. Chesterton 
states that before the first World War he realized that Britain was not 
always right: 

120 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


tims to this poison. And the victims become almost 
immune to argument. They are able to believe that 
lurking in the minds of several foreign peoples, 
secret and hidden until a war breaks out, lie uncon- 
trollable desires to rape, to destroy, to murder 
babies, to mangle corpses—while the inextricable 
mixture of peoples who inhabit these islands or 
happen to be our allies have no such desires, and 
would control them if they had. 

This becomes, when a war situation has been fully 
reached, the dominant note in the propaganda of 
the governments and their supporters (as in Nazi 
Germany to-day). But before war, other notes are 
needed. Before war, it is necessary to convince the 
whole population that no one in Britain, not a single 
politician or capitalist even, desires or makes any but 
the most reluctant preparations for war. Mr. 
Churchill, in his wireless speech on November 16, 
1934, claimed that no one in Britain ‘outside a mad- 
house’ wished to attack or invade any other country. 

Churchill’s claim is severe comment on his own 
past. According to his own account, in his World 
Crisis, his tenure of office as Secretary of State for 
War in Mr. Lloyd George’s Government was 
largely occupied in urging that the Soviet Govern- 


A blacker thing than blood’s own dye, 

Weighed down great Hawkins on the sea; 

And Nelson turned his blindest eye 

On Naples and on liberty. 
But when war breaks out he thanks the Germans, the throne and 
‘frozen folk . . . who have no faith a man could mourn’ because they 
‘bring my English heart to me,’ i.e., restore his faith in British 
imperialism’s righteousness. It will be seen that war propaganda 


produces the type of faith that can move mountains. 
I2I 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


ment should be destroyed by military action.* He 
might reply that the military action contemplated 
would not in the main have been carried out by 
British troops. But that is a traditional form of 
British aggression : to hire, bully, persuade or permit 
some other army to do our fighting for us—as in the 
case of the Greek advance into Turkey after the war, 
which ended so disastrously for the Greeks. 

The view that wars are only caused by foreigners 
is not the monopoly of Churchills or of Psalmists. 
Mr. Gibson, presenting to the 1934 Trades Union 
Congress the General Council’s report on peace and 
war, said: 


‘Peace in our view does not mean the negative if 
highly desirable policy of seeing that this country 
abstains from war. ... There is little likelihood that 
this country would be an aggressor.’ 


And this claim that British policy is peaceful is 
voiced as continually by the present Labour Party 
leadership as it used to be by Mr. MacDonald when 
he was their leader. It is here that the propaganda 
that prepares war under the guise of peace has its 
most important expression, because the Labour 
Party is the most powerful organization for influen- 
cing working-class opinion in Britain. The millions 
who are members or constant supporters of the 
Labour Party are the men and women who, at the 
lathes or the machine-guns, will matter most in the 


* Mr. Churcnill wrote on March 24, 1920: ‘Since the Armistice 
my policy would have been ‘‘Peace with the German people, war on 
the Bolshevik tyranny.” ’ (World Crisis: The Aftermath, p. 377.) 


122 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


second World War. They can only be persuaded to 
fight in this war if they are made to believe that | 
their country, peaceful, partly disarmed, working 
only for agreement among the ‘foreigners,’ is 
attacked or threatened by foreign war-makers. 

But before we examine the attitude of the Labour 
Party leaders on this question, let us look first at the 
real nature of the policy of British imperialism. Is it 
really peaceful? 

The history of the latter half of the nineteenth 
century is largely a history of the grabbing of Africa, 
and of other colonial countries. It was a period of 
wars against colonial peoples for the seizure of 
‘unoccupied territory’ (that is, territory not occu- 
pied by strong Powers equipped with modern arma- 
ments, or by local rulers willing to serve such Powers 
as agents). In this period the British ruling class 
grabbed more successfully and on a larger scale than 
any other. Later, when the division of the world 
into colonies and ‘spheres of influence’ was nearing 
completion, came wars for the re-division of part of 
the world, for a ‘new deal.’ The U.S.A. and Spain 
fought over the colonies of Cuba and the Philippines, 
Japan and Tsarist Russia fought over Korea and 
Manchuria. These were reshufflings at the edges of 
the world. Meanwhile at the world’s centre pres- 
sures grew volcanic. Across innumerable threads of 
policy and interest, trade and greed and fear, 
appeared the vast pattern of two world-schemes at 
grips. One, the less ambitious, was Berlin—Baghdad. 
The other had for its main shape Cape Town—Cairo-— 
Calcutta. 

123 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


These schemes were mutually exclusive. The 
German scheme met with obstacles among the 
Balkan States that blocked the way from Berlin to 
Constantinople. A Balkan State in the way, Serbia, 
was under Russian protection; Russia was France’s 
ally; there was an entente between France and 
Britain; so the web was woven. The sequence of 
Serajevo, the Austrian ultimatum, the World War, 
was the inevitable outcome of this. 

The position now occupied by the Labour leaders, 
as the principal advocates of a popular democracy, 
aspiring to a gradual change in capitalism, was occu- 
pied in 1914 by Lloyd George. Swinging his fol- 
lowers into support for the war in 1914, he swore ‘as 
the Lord liveth’ that the British Government had no 
desire for a single inch of additional colonial terri- 
tory; they were defending Belgium, and their own 
country, and the sanctity of treaties. 

Mr. Lloyd George, having made so many speeches, 
cannot be expected to remember them all. But one 
of his murmuration of secretaries ought to have 
reminded him of that speech before letting him print, 
in the third volume of his War Memoirs, the frank and 
illuminating phrases on war aims written by General 
Smuts. Smuts, when he wrote these, in May 1917, was 
a member of the Imperial War Cabinet. In a docu- 
ment on the military situation he wrote that ‘apart 
from the subsidiary recommendations of those 
committees’ (two committees of the War Cabinet) 
‘our war aims are now limited to the following four: 

‘(a) Destruction of the German colonial system 
with a-view to the future security of all communica- 
124 


—— r m 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


tions vital to the British Empire. This has already 
been done—an achievement of enormous value 
which ought not to be endangered at the peace 
negotiations. 

‘(b) Tearing off from the Turkish Empire all parts 
that may afford Germany opportunity of expansion 
to the Far East and of endangering our position as 
an Asiatic Power. This has essentially been achieved, 
although the additional conquest of Palestine may be 
necessary to complete this task. ’* 


The two subsequent clauses deal with Europe. 

These were not admitted war aims. Passchen- 
daele would not have been fought through to its 
sticky finish if this document had been given to the 
world and to the armies as the reasons for their 
sacrifices. It is a private statement of the thoughts 
of the Imperial War Cabinet, written for circulation 
to members of that Cabinet. 

It puts first the security of the Empire’s communi- 
cations and the retention of colonies seized. Second 
comes ‘our position as an Asiatic Power.’ Gallant 
little Belgium is a bad third. 

The minds of present Cabinets are made in the 
same moulds. The safety of the Empire, our position 
as the rulers of India, are mainsprings of British 
policy still. The Soviet Union, Japan, America— 
against the ‘threats’ of these Powers, against their 
propaganda, against the navies, commercial and 
financial penetration of the latter two, the rulers of 
the Empire carry on a policy of ‘defence,’ which 
means a policy of war during peace. 

* D. Lloyd George, War Memoirs, Vol. III, London, 1994, p. 1531. 

125 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


In the interests of this ‘defence,’ a Japanese 
gentleman dies inexplicably in a Singapore police- 
station, or an American missionary is murdered by a 
war-lord near Tibet. If Japan or America proceeded 
to act in these matters, they would of course be 
aggressors; the British are not warlike; but is this 
‘defence’ different in essentials from aggression?* 
In the interests of peace and the ‘defence’ of peace- 
ful citizens, Britain sent a large army to China in 
1927. It was Philip Snowden, Labour Chancellor 
of the Exchequer, who expressed most openly the 
larger issues of the struggle for China, the aims of 
the contending Powers. A hush fell on the House of 
Commons as he told it that if every Chinaman would 
only wear his shirt a foot longer, all Lancashire’s 
export problems would be solved. This is the high 
and humane hope behind the struggle of Japan, 
Britain and America to secure undisputed control of 
these four hundred million people. 

In the markets of the other three-quarters of the 
world British capital and American fight desperately. 
British money fights American on a world scale, 
pound and dollar, gold and silver, bank rates and 
insurances—immense sums are used, such as the 
British Government’s £ 300,000,000 exchange equaliz- 


* Britain and France are considered ‘peaceful,’ because ‘satiated,’ 
by German Social-Democrats, and the idea has been brought to 
England by a Social-Democrat who has persuaded some English 
people that he is a Marxist. (See Why War? published by the 
National Council of Labour Colleges.) The idea was originally 
Bismarck’s and the phrase ‘satiated’ was first applied to Britain and 
France by him. It may correctly describe a temporary position but 
noe a permanent one: imperialist appetites are increased by in- 

igestion. 


126 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


ation fund, to make these monies weapons in the 
fight for sales, for profitable and safe investments, for 
the control of raw materials. ‘We fight for oil,’ 
wrote Ludwell Denny, and showed in a brilliant 
book the savage scramble of the U.S.A., led by 
Standard Oil, to beat the British firms, of which the 
greatest is the Royal Dutch-Shell combine. 

Wherever there is a smell of oil, a seepage staining 
the earth (even in California or the Middle West, 
America’s home fields) British companies carry on 
the war. Bribery, arson, murder, and several South 
American revolutions come into the picture. The 
governments help all they can. 

In South American markets British capital at one 
time held predominance. Now in the majority of 
these republics the U.S. dollar is in power. Some 
of the markets are shared amicably, as when the 
Electric Boat Co. of New York sells submarines to 
Peru, and passes over orders by Peru’s neighbours 
and ‘enemies’ to Vickers (who pay a share of the 
profits to the Electric Boat Co.)* But in other cases 
agreements cannot be reached or are broken; one 
result is that for four years, in fever-ridden jungles 
of the Chaco, the patient half-Indian peoples of 
Bolivia and Paraguay have been carrying on a war 
that is modern in most of its details—the hospital 
services being an exception. Death claims over 
twenty per cent. of the combatants. The League of 
Nations inquires into this war, twice a year; but big 
capital is involved, tin and oil and shipping, Britain 
and the U.S.A. ; so the League gets nowhere. 


* See the reports of the American Senate’s armaments inquiry. 
127 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


There are other issues dividing these two world 
empires besides markets, colonies, semi-colonies. It 
has sometimes seemed as if the ‘scrap of paper’ for 
the second World War would be a war loan bond of 
the first. Britain borrowed money in 1917 and 1918 
not only for herself but for her allies. The payments 
made have scarcely scratched the surface of the 
debt. Now real payments arë no longer made; 
‘token’ amounts cross the Atlantic instead. The 
Americans will stand this ‘token’ trick for as long as 
it pleases the big Trusts, the millionaires, the oil ring, 
steel kings, and Roosevelt. But when they choose not 
to put up with it any longer, Britain is a defaulter, a 
country that will not pay its debts. Britain has 
fought wars for such reasons in the past; might not 
America? 

And the clash between Britain and America comes 
also right inside the British Empire, tending to split 
up that unwieldy conglomeration. Canada is largely 
controlled by American capital, and increasingly. 
Mr. de Valera’s government in Ireland has behind 
it an alliance of Irish bourgeois and petty bourgeois 
forces with U.S. capitalism. It maintains, as an 
enemy outpost at the gates of Britain, an army and 
air force not too inclined to think of England as a 
friend. It allows another army to exist, the I.R.A., 
which is well supplied with Thompson sub-machine- 
guns. In Chicago, this is the gangsters’ gun; in all 
other parts of the world it is the weapon of armies to 
which the U.S.A. is benevolent. When the roth 
Chinese Army fought and held the Japanese, north 
of Shanghai, the ‘Tommy gun’ was their main 
128 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


weapon. When a new government, American- 
financed, appeared in the Chinese province of 
Fukien, there again was this brisk little weapon. It 
turns up in Mexico and in South America. An 
interesting arm! 

Because of this deep-rooted antagonism between 
Britain and America, and because of the class hatred 
among British rulers directed against the Soviet 
Union, Japan’s adventurous policy in the past three 
years, her seizure of Manchuria and her attack on 
Shanghai, has had cautious support or (even more 
useful) calm and formal criticism from Britain. The 
head of Imperial Chemical Industries, Ltd., visited 
Tokyo at the most critical point in these imperialist 
adventures. One of the heads of the Mitsubishi com- 
bine, the Vickers of Japan (and connected with 
Vickers by share-holdings in subsidiary companies) 
lives permanently in a London suburb. The Federa- 
tion of British Industries recently sent a large 
delegation of leading members to Manchuria, to study 
on the spot—naturally with the help of the Japanese 
rulers of ‘independent’ Manchukuo—the possibili- 
ties of trade. This was particularly galling to the 
Americans, who find their business men in practice 
shut out of all territories controlled by Japan.* The 


* An American bishop was recently refused permission to land 
on an island for which Japan has a ‘Mandate’ from the League. The 
Japanese must know of the habits of the American clergy, one at 
least of whom was revealed at the Senate inquiry as a missionary on 
Sundays and a dealer in chemical poison gases on weekdays. And 
perhaps the American bishop also knew something about the 
Japanese: that these islands—which Japan ought to hand back to 
the League shortly, but will not—are being fortified, contrary to the 
terms of the Mandate under which they are held, and the terms of 

. the Washington Treaty. 


I 129 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


head of the mission, Lord Barnby, was indiscreet 
enough to say (and the Morning Post was foolish 
enough to print) : ‘I think we should see Manchukuo 
through Japanese eyes, for they understand it best. 
. .. It is our desire to connect Great Britain, Japan 
and Manchukuo with the chains of friendship.’ In 
the capital, Kirin, Lord Barnby found time to call 
on the Japanese Chief of Staff. The delegation later 
met the Japanese Commander-in-Chief and dis- 
cussed the ‘traditional friendship’ between Britain 
and Japan. 

But after all Lord Barnby is not a member of the 
government, just a business man, a civilian? Yes. 
He is also a director of Lloyd’s Bank and a director 
of Dawnay, Day & Co., merchant bankers. Another 
director of the latter firm is Major-General G. P. 
Dawnay, who is also a director of Vickers-Armstrong 
and chairman of Armstrong-Whitworths. Another 
Dawnay helps to keep the B.B.C. on the side of the 
angels. The firm was represented among the heads 
of the buying departments at the War Office until 
recently. Lord Barnby, in other words, is one of our 
rulers; when he speaks it is as the voice of the British 
capitalist class. 

In reply, the U.S.A. builds warships up to the 
limits allowed by treaty, builds the biggest air force 
in the world, and fortifies Dutch Harbour, a naval 
base in the Aleutian Islands near Alaska, that can 
only be of use in a war with Japan. Alaska itself, 
with a population of less than 60,000, has been 
equipped with seventy-two aerodromes and six sea- 
plane bases, 470 miles of railway and thirty-five cable 
130 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


and telegraph stations. The cable system, built by the 
U.S. Army Signal Corps, works at a loss. The rail- 
way, built and owned by the U.S. government, works 
at aloss. The air lines are ridiculously uneconomic. 
War demands sacrifices. 

In the struggle against Britain, time is on America’s 
side, and the crisis. Keeping the dollar usually a 
shade below the pound, destroying the world eco- 
nomic conferences that Britain hoped so much from, 
American capitalism concentrates on being ready at 
the appropriate moment to deal with Britain’s tradi- 
tional friend, Japan. Even sometimes a clumsy 
effort is made (as recently on the question of the 
‘freedom of the seas’ and naval armaments) to 
neutralize Britain for a while in order to be the freer 
to oppose Japan. 

America is considered a very peaceful country, in 
foreign affairs at any rate. But great firms like 
Messrs. E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., a combine 
with some 50 million dollars of capital, are not likely 
to forget that during the first World War they made 
profits at a rate ten times higher than the normal 
pre-war level. The ‘direct economic motive’ is not 
the sole cause of war, often not the main cause; but 
it does help a bit sometimes, in a depression, to think 
of those four years in which it was possible to pay out 
as dividends sums amounting to over 450 per cent. 
of the capital.* 


* These were not exceptional profits. On December 13, 1934, the 
Senate Arms Inquiry went into the question of war profiteering. The 
following facts emerged: 

United Steel: average annual profits i in 191 2, 1913, 1914, were 89 
million dollars; average annual profits in 1916, 1917, 1918, were 


131 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


This vast struggle between the U.S.A. and Britain, 
the two largest world-empires ever existing, only 
reaches the stage of open warfare occasionally, in 
out-of-the-way places like County Clare or the Chaco 
frontier. But war, said Clausewitz, its greatest 
student, ‘is a political instrument, a continuation of 
political commerce, a carrying out of this commerce 
by other means.’ t The ‘political commerce’ of 
British imperialism consists very largely of a struggle 
for supremacy in shipping, oil, aeroplanes, trade, 
finance, world position, against the United States. 
It also consists of a patient effort to organise capi- 
talist unity in Europe against the Soviet Union. 
Who is the ‘aggressor’ in this struggle? What sense 
is there in claiming that Britain is peaceful, while 
this ‘political commerce’ drives ahead every day? 

Yet that claim is echoed from the platforms of the 
Labour Party and the pulpits of the churches every 
day. And almost all those who echo it, together with 


484 million dollars. The profits in the best year, 1917, were 35 per 
cent. on the capital invested. 

Armour, Cudahy, Morris and Swift (all meat-packing firms) : average 
annual profits in 1912, 1913 and 1914, were 19 million dollars for 
these four. In 1915, 1916, 1917, their average annual profits were 
46 million dollars. The Armour firm increased its capital from 
20 million dollars to 100 million in 1916, no new money being sub- 
scribed; the increase was by share bonus. 

Bethlehem Steel: 61,800,000 dollars profit in 1917—43 per cent. 

Calumet and Hecla Copper Mining: 800 per cent. in 1917, 300 per. 
cent. in 1918. 

Colts’ Firearms: 5,797,000 dollars profit in 1917—6o0 per cent.; 
5,693,000 in 1918. 

Many other firms made similar amounts. Comparable figures for 
Britain are not available, because the Excess Profits Duty forced 
firms to camouflage their ‘earnings.’ But profits were probably 
almost as high. 

¢ Clausewitz, On War, I, i, 


132 


THEY SPEAK PEACE 


exposure of the horrors of war, believe honestly and 
earnestly that they are thereby furthering the cause 
. Of peace. 

Except for the few, now very few, leaders of the 
‘Labour Party who remain pure pacifists, almost all 
of them believe in one or other of the schemes for 
preventing war described as ‘collective security’ or 
as ‘an international police force.’ With these schemes 
we shall deal later, in chapters on the way to end 
war. But here it is necessary to note that each of 
these schemes, each of the existent or proposed 
organizations embodying them, must in fact and 
action help the war-makers if—it is this ‘if’ we shall 
discuss later—they draw working-class attention 
away from a real way to prevent war, and concen- 
trate it on an unreal way. And each of these schemes 
is doubly dangerous if it can be adopted, in part or 
whole, by a capitalist government, and twisted into a 
cover and excuse for a capitalist war. 
= We have seen, in a previous chapter, that the plan 
for a war on the Soviet Union, by Japan, Germany, 
and Poland, is well advanced; we can see that 
British policy supports this plan and shields it. To 
clamour about the beastliness of war, and at the same 
time to praise our own statesmen’s peaceful policy, 
can only help this plan to fruition. It hides the real 
nature of British policy from those who need to see 
and struggle against this policy, those who can check 
it, hamper it, hold it up. Yet the people who thus 
help to hide the war plans, leaders and spokesmen of 
the Labour movement and of the churches, almost all 
hate war and believe that they are working for peace. 


133 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


They are, these honest speakers of peace, victims 
of the delusions of idealism; they believe that the 
kindly characters of British politicians, the amiable 
nature of their intentions, the virtuous rectitude of 
their professions, really mean something. They 
cannot see that this so conscious rectitude weighs 
featherweight in the scales against the inescapable 
pressure of economic facts, and the need of a profit- 
seeking class to secure its profits and its power—at 
the expense of competitors or of another and a 
threatening class. 

Pure pacifism exists also, the denial that any 
forcible means should ever be employed, by govern- 
ments or by classes, in pursuit of their economic and 
political ends. It is often worthy of respect, as an 
emotion embodied in strong characters. It has no 
pretention to logic or reality, since it resolutely 
refuses to see that the adoption of pacifism by those 
who look forward to a new order of society, those who 
refuse to tolerate economic anarchy any longer, 
would leave the bankers and the armament manu- 
facturers free to do exactly what they like to the 
world and its population. Pacifism is preached to 
rich and poor alike, rulers and ruled. But do 
Kreugers and Staviskys, and their lesser or greater 
allies, Zaharoffs, J. P. Morgans—do these people 
listen? 


134 


CHAPTER VII 
WARS END—AND HOW 


WE have described a war that is likely, and some 
aspects of this war that are almost certain. And the 
technical preparations for this war, in which, we 
believe, those of the British capitalist class are the 
most important. And the diplomatic preparations, 
in which the British Government’s hand can be seen. 
And the political preparations, the propaganda, in 
which the line of the Labour Party seems of key 
importance. The rest of this book is devoted to ways 
to end this war, or—if we can—to prevent it hap- 
pening. 

We take first the question : how can such a World 
War be ended? For, after all, the probability is that 
we shall not be able to prevent it happening. That 
does not mean that we should concentrate now on 
this question of the future; we should concentrate 
now on our efforts to prevent war, efforts of the 
present. To wait, to delay, to accept the war as 
inevitable, means neglecting the present struggle, the 
fact, for the future struggle, the phrase. Yet it will 
be useful to deal shortly with that future, since when 
war is actually upon us there will be little chance to 
discuss openly the way to end it. 

A war, engineered in secret, put across swiftly, 
covered up with an impenetrable smoke-screen of 

135 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


lies and censorship, will sweep masses of the working 
class off their feet. Their patriotic fever, since it is 
produced by ignorance that is their rulers’ fault, and 
by a very human belief in the honesty of the words 
they hear, will not be so horrible a phenomenon as 
the war fever of the ‘educated,’ who have every 
chance to find out the facts, and every reason to 
suspect, from the beginning, the honesty of all 
capitalist propaganda. And the working class will 
recover more quickly. From the very beginning 
there will exist, as outlaws, groups of men and 
women, a party that no suppression can defeat, who 
will work, in the interests of the working class, for 
the ending of the war., 

The older forms of warfare, in which the armies 
alone mattered, ended with the defeat of the army 
of the weaker side. The new form of war, in which 
the working populations are, in Major-General 
Fuller’s words, the main ‘sources of military power,’ 
is ended—naturally and inevitably—by the effect 
of war on these working populations. The Franco- 
Prussian War, which might have continued longer 
than it did had not the threat and then the reality 
of the Commune driven the French ruling class into 
Bismarck’s arms, belonged to the old form of war but 
foreshadowed the new. The Russo-Japanese War, 
ending in an abortive revolution in Russia—abortive, 
yet a necessary ‘rehearsal’—was right on the thres- 
hold of the present day. The first World War opened 
fully the period in which wars are ended in a new way. 

No war has ever, in any period, been ended by the 
refusal of a number of non-combatant individuals to 
136 


WARS END-—AND HOW 


take part in it.* That is fact, history, reality. We ; 
cannot alter it by our wishes or by the purity of our ' 
intentions. Perhaps if we strain our imaginations we 
can construct some hope that the future will be 
different from the past in this matter. But does it 
seem likely that the future World War will ‘yield to 
treatment’ by such individuals? It seems very 
unlikely. The essence of individual ‘war-resistance’ 
during a war amounts to this: as the eyes of a certain 
number of men and women are opened, as they begin 
to be spurred towards action by grim facts, they 
must each, as individuals, withdraw from their work, 
from the human relationships they possess, the people 
they can persuade or influence—and go to prison. 
That may be, for each individual, a noble choice, if 
he knows no more effective way of helping to end the 
massacre of his fellow-men. Or it may be a selfish 
choice, a callous attempt to save one’s own soul, no 
matter what the effect on many neighbours’ bodies. 
But in any case it does not stop the war. 

Indeed it may sometimes help the war govern- 
ment. It isolates in prison, in sterility, the individuals 
whose realization of facts and anger against war 
could be blended with the resentment and longing 
for peace in thousands of other minds, as necessary 
parts of a movement of revolt. 

It is by movements of revolt, affecting thousands of 
people armed and unarmed, that wars end to-day, 
or to-morrow. 


* A civil war in a minor Balkan State is said to have been ended 
by the female population refusing their usual aid and comfort to 
the male. The story is historically doubtful, and psychologically 
incredible. 

137 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Capitalist propaganda has made many people 
believe that such movements are contrary to the 
outlook and nature of the English people. The re- 
verse is true, and has been since Froissart, the 
Maurois of the Middle Ages, described the English as 
a nation very perilous to rule. In some ways the most 
useful example and precedent, in considering such 
movements, is the Ulster revolt not a generation ago. 

A Liberal government passed laws to which the 
Tory Party had some objection. The Government 
had—for what it is worth—a mandate for their 
action from elections fought on this issue (which a 
government that declares war never has). But the 
Tories succeeded, by armed revolt, in forcing the 
Government to retreat. 

The arms used to equip the 100,000 Ulster Volun- 
teers were illegally and forcibly brought into the 
country from abroad. That may or may not be a 
precedent of value: a movement including a large 
proportion of the industrial workers who make arms 
has sometimes other opportunities for securing the 
weapons it needs. No single method can be relied 
upon ; every possible method is—possible. 

Other precedents apply more closely. A govern- 
ment that declares war for the sake of ‘a gallant 
little Austria’ (or Paraguay, or Manchukuo) might 
well be reminded of Sir Edward Carson’s words: 
‘the Government has treated us with fraud ; if necess- 
ary we will treat the Government with force’ (April 
9, 1912, at Belfast). That has always been the posi- 
tion of the English people when roused to take a real 
interest in politics. 

138 


WARS END-—AND HOW 


Other statements made at the same period can be 
taken as useful precedents by anti-war propagandists 
endeavouring to avert a threatened war, or to end one 
that has become a fact. These statements are par- 
ticularly useful because the authors of them were 
later given the highest offices in the administration 
of the law, and we can therefore be certain that such 
statements will not lead to trouble with the authori- 
ties. The reader will doubtless pardon a short diver- 
sion from the main argument, for the sake of such 
words as these: 


‘We will shortly challenge the Government. ... 
They may tell us if they like that that is treason. 
We are prepared to take the consequences, and in 
the struggle we will not be alone, because we will 
have all the best of England with us.’ (Sir Edward 
Carson, at Blenheim, July 27, 1912.) 

‘We regard the Government as having . . . seized 
by fraud upon despotic power. We shall use any 
means to deprive them of the power they have 
usurped.’ (Bonar Law, Blenheim, July 27, 1912.) 

‘We will set up a government. I am told it will be 
illegal. Of course it will.’ (Carson, May 16, 1913.) 

‘Nothing was left but the unconstitutional resist- 
ance of men who in the last resort were prepared to 
take up arms against the Bill.’ (F. E. Smith, June 15, 


1914.) 


Two or three years later Sir Edward Carson was 
given the Attorney-Generalship, one of the highest 
legal positions in England, and one always filled by 
a lawyer whose past has been beyond reproach— 
even if his present is beyond anticipation. Bonar 


139 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Law became a member of the Cabinet. A few years 
later F. E. Smith was Lord Chancellor, head of the 
Law in England. While we cannot guarantee that 
leaders of the struggle against war who model their 
eloquence on such examples will necessarily follow 
these gentlemen to their high places, we feel that it 
is certain that the peculiar law of England on the 
freedom of speech and of the press will, in such a 
case, be interpreted with restraint and wisdom. This 
law, John Stuart Mill pointed out long ago, ‘is as 
servile to this day as it was in the time of the Tudors,’ 
but, he said, ‘there is little danger of its being actually 
put into force against political discussion, except 
during some temporary panic, when fear of insur- 
rection drives ministers and judges from their 
propriety’ (On Liberty, 1859). No fear ever drives a 
modern minister or judge from his propriety. 

One further aspect of the Ulster movement can be 
noted (before we return to the main argument of 
this chapter) : its dealings with the army. Bonar Law 
said in November 1913: 


‘In order to carry out his despotic intention King 
James had the largest paid army which had ever 
been seen in England. What happened? There was 
a revolution and the King disappeared. Why? 
Because his own army refused to fight for him.’ 


Four months later Bonar Law said that the 
Government had no right to ask the army to under- 
take ‘to coerce Ulster. ... Any officer who refuses is 
only doing his duty’ (March 23, 1914). And in fact 
officers did refuse. It is impossible to believe that the 
140 


WARS END-—AND HOW 


duty of an officer in such matters is different from the 
duty of any soldier. 

The argument may be used that in these satisfying 
quotations we have relied too much on Tory sources. 
Let us, therefore, quote a politician who has, during 
his life, proclaimed several creeds, but never has 
had anything to do with Toryism. ‘There come 
times when the unjust action of a kept Parliamentary 
majority should be resisted.’ That was written by 
Mr. Ramsay MacDonald in Forward, October 29, 
192I. 

In our subsequent discussion, therefore, of the way 
in which those who oppose war should resist the 
actions of the Government, should arm their fol- 
lowers, should set up a government, should ‘treat’ 
the war-making authorities with force, we hope it will 
be clear that we are not using these words or these 
ideas in a sense dissimilar to the way in which they 
were used by Carson, Bonar Law, Smith, and 
MacDonald. 

We will begin with the question of the relation 
between a movement of revolt against war and the 
armed forces. It is argued, by opponents of any 
action except such as may be allowed by the ruling 
class, that it is impossible for a movement of revolt to 
succeed because the troops are certain to crush it at 
once. 

But is this true? 

If one looks through English history carefully one 
finds that the danger in any revolutionary situation, 
from the revolutionaries’ point of view, is not so often 
that their movement will come up against resistance 


141 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


of troops and other forces used by the government, 
as that the mutinies of these forces will break out 
before the revolutionary movement is strong enough 
and ready enough to work with them to a useful issue. 
Under the influence of the French Revolution one 
hundred and thirty years ago there were mutinies at 
the Nore, Spithead, etc., which led to the passing of 
the Incitement to Mutiny Act (under which Com- 
munists are still occasionally jailed). During the 
highest point reached by this wave of mutinies the 
whole of the Home Fleet was in the hands of the 
rebels, who began to blockade London and only 
failed to carry the movement further because they 
received no support whatever worth mentioning from 
working-class or radical sections of the population. 
A few years later, during the struggle with the 
machine-breakers who followed ‘Ned Ludd,’ a 
soldier refused to fire on the ‘mob.’ He was sen- 
tenced to 300 lashes—practically death by torture. 
But within the next thirty years such methods of 
repression became too dangerous, owing to the 
effective propaganda of the Chartists. General 
Napier, commander of the forces in the industrial 
north during this period, wrote on May 9, 1839, soon 
after assuming his command, that the first attempts 
to tamper with the troops were being made. ‘I am 
indeed very anxious for hiring barracks at any cost, 
from what I hear of the attempts to seduce the 
soldiers.’ He grows anxious for the comfort of his 
men, their quarters and food, because ‘every effort 
is being made to corrupt them.’ 
A soldier of the Rifles, an educated man, avows 


142 


WARS END—AND HOW 


himself a Chartist, and Napier tries to win him over 
by sweet words. The cat-of-nine-tails has become too 
dangerous. 

‘There are many Chartists among the Rifles,’ 
Napier writes to his brother in July 1839. The same 
month he writes again that ‘At Hull, soldiers and 
mob joined to thrash the police.’ The soldiers 
started the attack, crying ‘Damn your eyes, we are 
all Chartists.’ 

Our police force was formed at this period by the 
Tory mill-owner, Peel, because the capitalists no 
longer felt that the troops could be relied on to 
massacre the workers (police were armed with 
swords and carbines then), and because their own 
yeomanry were afraid. Even Napier writes, ‘the 
police are odious to the people.’ 

The best account we have of the Chartists’ attitude 
to the soldiers is in Harney’s paper, The London 
Democrat, in a letter from the Leeds revolutionary 
journalist, William Rider. 

Rider writes, under the heading, ‘What will the 
Soldiers Do?’ as follows: 


‘The army, as a body, will not serve corruption’s 
cause—they know that when the strength of their 
manhood has passed away, when their constitutions 
are broken up, and they are no longer deemed fit for 
the service, the toil-worn, emaciated soldier must 
then repair to some infernal bastille (Rider means a 
work-house), there to experience the curses of the 
damnable system we are now labouring to destroy. 

‘Yes, sir, and destroy it we shall.... But what 
will the soldiers do during the struggle? ... The 


143 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


poor simple things who preach up procrastination 
and moral force, and talk about the rashness of us 
pike, dagger and tuck-up-the-sleeve men, . . . will 
say, “we fear the soldiers will oppose the people.” 

‘Now, sir, I have no such fears; on the contrary, I 
believe the soldiers will be our supporters in the 
coming struggle. ... I do fear the moral force men 
will be traitors in the cause (if we are to consider 
them as being at all connected with us), but I have 
an idea that the soldiers will supply the places of 
the moral force men in our ranks.’ 


Rider then goes on to tell how eagerly the soldiers 
read the revolutionary Chartist Press, the Northern 
Star and London Democrat. Rider ends by quoting from 
‘a friend’s’ letter telling of a meeting between 
Chartists and soldiers in a tavern, a sergeant in the 
chair and seventy or eighty soldiers present, who 
listened for an hour and a half to an address on 
Chartism. The soldiers elected a delegation to the 
local Chartist organization to arrange further meet- 
ings. The Chartists actually penetrated into the 
barracks and regular meetings with the soldiers’ 
delegates were arranged. In this way, concludes 
Rider, must work be carried on in the army to win 
the soldiers over to our side and to persuade them to 
‘unsheath the sword in behalf of the people.’ 

The language is old-fashioned, but the thought is 
that of those English workers of the Chartist days 
who worked out in practice the theory of the class 
struggle. From them Marx and Engels learned.* 


* I am indebted to Ralph Fox, author of The Class Struggle in 
Britain, London, 1933, for the whole of this material on the Chartist 
period, which appeared in an article written by him in 1990. 


144 


WARS END-—AND HOW 


The Russian Revolution of 1905 seems to have had 
a remarkable effect in the British Navy. (The effect 
was probably increased by the tragic incompetence 
of the Russian naval officers in the war with Japan.) 
There was the famous incident in 1906 of the British 
officer who became so rattled by the continual quiet 
antagonism of his crew that he brought matters to 
explosion point by yelling at one of the seamen ‘on 
the knee, dog!’ In October 1906 naval barracks in 
Malta were destroyed in rioting. 

By 1909, when a wave of industrial ‘unrest’ was 
beginning to move in Britain, the number of cases of 
‘breach of discipline’ in the Navy reached the highest 
level ever known. There were 116,000 such cases 
during that year. The strength of the Navy, including 
petty officers, was roughly 100,000 at the time. 

During the summer of 1918 ships’ committees 
began to be elected in the British Navy, and dele- 
gates from these ships’ committees began to form 
port committees at each port where there was a 
moderately stable naval population. The police 
strike in the summer of 1918 seems to have given the 
lead for this movement, in which the main demand 
at first was for a fully organized trade union affiliated 
to the T.U.C. and recognized by the Admiralty. At 
Portsmouth, in July 1918, an Admiralty agent named 
Yexley found that a general strike was being dis- 
cussed hotly by the port delegates. The very high 
level of political intelligence reached by the British 
Navy at this time is shown by the fact that the 
delegates were discussing, in connection with their 
plans for a general strike, the need to get in touch 


K 145 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


with German sailors and organize jointly with them 
action against both governments to end the war. 
Only very skilful handling by the Admiralty pre- 
vented these plans maturing. The ships were 
replaced, and scattered. Pay and conditions were 
improved and no punishments were attempted until 
the sky was clearer.* 

In 1925 the Admiralty reported that it was con- 
cerned about the ‘spread of Bolshevism’ in the 
Navy. Practically all the crews at that time con- 
sisted of new entrants since the war. In 1926 during 
the General Strike naval ratings were drafted ashore 
for strike-breaking work at Pembroke Dock. They 
were driven to such a pitch of anger and disgust 
by the discipline imposed that they nearly killed 
one of their petty officers, hanging him from a beam 
in a hut. He was cut down just in time by an officer. 

During the year before Invergordon there were six 
cases of minor mutinies, the ships involved being the 
Revenge, the Royal Oak, Vindictive, Repulse, Ramillies 
and Lucia. The mutiny on the last-named of these 
was considerably larger than the others and found 
its way into the press. Forty-two men were arrested. 

Invergordon, therefore, which need not be de- 
scribed here since it is well known to everyone, was 
not an isolated incident; nor is the Navy the only 
force in which such incidents have occurred. Major- 
Generals are said to have died of apoplexy between 
Aldershot and Salisbury Plain when hearing whole 
battalions whistling the tune of the ‘Red Flag,’ 
and being told after their first outbursts that this 


* Lionel Yexley, in the Fleet, 1930 and 1931. 
146 


-OOO o m ee 


WARS END-—AND HOW 


was a hymn tune of which the men were very 
fond. 

The number of men in the Army sentenced for 
acts of sedition and mutiny during the war were: 


1916 ve ʻi a 60 
1917 is i pi 221 
1918 én — Ms 676 


It is necessary to underline the enormous extent 
and importance of such movements during the last 
years of the War and immediately after it. Winston 
Churchill states that in one week early in 1919 there 
were thirty cases of deliberate insubordination in the 
British Army. In January 1919 there was a revolt 
at Calais which Churchill says involved about 4,000 
men. Other accounts put the number involved at 
nearer 10,000. Two whole Divisions were moved to 
Calais to crush this movement, the men being told 
that the Calais mutineers were obstructing the 
demobilization of the Army. In order to prevent 
these two Divisions from finding out the truth and 
fraternising with the mutineers they had to be con- 
fined to camp as if they were prisoners. Next month 
the War Office in London was surrounded by 3,000 
men refusing to go back to France. 

The war on Russia was strangled during 1919 by 
the refusal of British troops to take part in it. In 
December 1918 whole units from the Army Service 
Corps at Park Royal marched in a disciplined parade 
to Downing Street protesting against being sent to 
Russia. In January 1919 the storm broke, in France 
at Calais, in Britain at Folkestone. 

‘ 


147 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


The careful reader will note that in all these 
descriptions of the mutinies no references to news- 
papers are given. That is because they have not been 
and cannot be gathered from newspapers. The 
account of the developments at Portsmouth are 
taken from a source I can acknowledge: Mr. Yexley, 
to prove his importance, boasted of these mutinies, 
and how he persuaded the Admiralty to deal with 
them sagaciously, in the columns of his paper, the 
Fleet. For an account of the Folkestone mutiny, in 
fairly full detail, the reader is invited to look at the 
issue of the Herald (then a weekly paper, edited Py 
George Lansbury) for January 11, 1919. 

The first point about this mutiny is that it was 
actually fifteen mutinies. The Herald lists fourteen 
places where some form of action was taken by sol- 
diers, in breach of ordinary discipline, in support of 
the ‘strike’ at Folkestone or along the same lines. 
The mutinies were at Folkestone, Dover, Osterley 
Park, Shortlands, Sydenham, Grove Park, Shore- 
ham, Kempton Park, Park Royal, Aldershot, Maid- 
stone, Chatham, Briston, Fairlop, and at a London 
railway station. Of these fifteen only four are men- 
tioned in the daily press.* 

The second point about Folkestone is that it was 
primarily a ‘strike’ against the despatch of troops 
abroad, particularly against the regulations enforcing 
a return to France on men who had been on leave or 
in hospital. Its main object, therefore, was to speed- 


* So far as I can find. This, with other indications, makes me 
think it possible that the list of such actions given in these pages is 
penay between a third and a half of the number that actually 
occurr 


148 


WARS END—AND How! 
up demobilization. But it was to some extent 
directed against the war on the Soviet Republic, and 
had in fact a big effect in preventing reinforcements 
being sent there. 

: The men ‘picketed’ the quays, and forcibly pre- 
vented both men and officers from getting on to the 
boats leaving for France. 

Complete political uncertainty prevailed, and 
Horatio Bottomley, editor of John Bull, was asked by 
representatives of the men to take up their case. But 
even he found it difficult to get them to promise to 
accept a ‘settlement,’ and a real speeding-up of 
demobilization had to take place. 
` At Blackpool and in the Isle of Wight similar 
movements occurred later in the month. Some 
police stations were attacked. In March there was a 
riot at Kinmel Camp, Liverpool. (Manchester 
Guardian, March 6 and April 17, 1919.) 

The opposition to the war on Russia did not 
happen only in England. At Libau in the Baltic a 
light cruiser crew mutinied. A ship had to be sent 
home from Archangel. Four destroyers, which 
arrived at Murmansk before their crews knew where 
they were going, had to be sent home. There were 
refusals by sailors to weigh for Russia during 1919 at 
Invergordon, Portsmouth, Rosyth, Devonport, and 
the Fort Edgar destroyer base. 

A typical incident in this grim struggle was the 
case of a cruiser at Rosyth. The ship was refitting 
when ordered to Russia. The destination leaked out 
because of the equipment that was being taken 
aboard. Sailors consulted with dockers, who appar- 
149 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


ently belonged to the Socialist Labour Party. The 
dockers got a leaflet printed in Glasgow. The crew 
eventually refused to move the ship from the dock. 
‘Loyal’ elements were gathered and the ship was 
moved out to sea, isolating the crew from shore 
influences. There the ship anchored and the officers 
by means of special propaganda material and lec- 
tures endeavoured to induce a more suitable frame 
of mind among the sailors. After three weeks at 
anchor, no success having been achieved, the vessel 
was sent to Portsmouth and the crew was dis- 
charged. 

An amusing example of the attitude of some of 
the British soldiers in Russia was reported from 
Baku. There a battalion refused to carry on its 
duties unless it could have permission to hire an 
interpreter for two evenings a week, who would read 
to members of the battalion Pravda and other Bol- 
shevik newspapers. After a fortnight of these read- 
ings the War Office decided to bring the battalion 
home. 

These movements had no effective support among 
civilians. The Councils of Workers and Soldiers 
formed in 1917 had been ‘taken care of’ by politicians 
such as Ramsay MacDonald, who attended their 
first conference. There was no revolutionary political 
party of experience and strength. Therefore move- 
ments of this sort—which might have ended the war 
on our side in 1919 if similar movements had not 
ended it in 1918 on the German side—had only a 
negative effect, hampering the war but not ending it. 
It will be possible for those who oppose the next 
150 


WARS END-AND HOW 


World War to see that such movements have a 
positive effect. 

But, it may be argued, the armed forces will 
matter little in the next war. The ‘centre of gravity’ 
will be the aeroplane and poison gas factories. 
Probably true; and it is more difficult for those who 
insist on continuance of the war to coerce civilians 
in industry than soldiers in the army—particularly 
difficult if troops are not available for such a purpose. 

The revolutions in Germany and Austria that did 
in fact end the first World War, and gave practical 
examples of how modern wars can be ended, were 
built up out of widening strike movements in which 
the working class learnt the brutality of the forces 
opposed to it, but also learnt its own power. In these 
strikes new leaders for the workers emerged. The 
anti-war demonstration led by Karl Liebknecht on 
May Day, 1916—1in spite of all repression—set the 
note for the political side of these movements ; but it 
was of course the example of the Russian workers and 
peasants in 1917 that had the decisive effect. 

In the first part of a war it is difficult to get strike 
action, even for grievances of an extremely serious 
nature. There is a feeling among the workers, care- 
fully fostered by capitalist propaganda, that to strike 
would be to let down the men in the trenches (or, 
in modern war, the men, women and children in the 
bigger cities where the bombs are falling). Slowly 
the realization grows that the factory workers and 
miners have to help rescue these men from the 
trenches, these people from the target cities, by 
ending the war. 


151 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Strikes are made illegal, or are met with the 
bitterest hatred. The capitalists hate ‘their’ workers 
who go on strike far more than they hate the 
‘enemy’ people. They are open about this: Owen 
Seaman wrote in Punch in 1915: 


When memory of Prussian foulness fails 
One thing will keep its fame 

Of tyranny and shame— 

The strike in Wales. 


In spite of this, strikes are possible, indeed inevit- 
able, during a war; they will occur even if the plans 
for industrial conscription treasured by the War 
Office are put into operation. Indeed, there may 
even occur strikes against the operation of these 
plans; carried out with the usual efficiency of the 
military leaders, this form of conscription may prove 
almost unworkable from any point of view. Any 
plan for such conscription, though it is supported 
with all the forces of the official trade union leader- 
ship, will meet serious opposition from the branch 
officials and members of the trade unions. 

A furious opposition will at once be roused against 
the war-making government and the War Office if 
—as seems likely—arrangements are made for the 
Whitehall staffs, the ‘essential war services’, to 
operate from bomb-proof and gas-proof shelters 
before these are provided for the civil population, 
particularly the factory workers. An opposition 
equally bitter, more of disgust than of anger, will be 
roused if the ‘Brass Hats’ and the government leave 
London for some safer centre. 

. 152 


WARS END--AND HOW 


To meet the needs of refugees from the bombed 
cities some form of compulsory civilian billeting or 
rationing of house space will be needed. This, if 
applied on capitalist lines, the houses of the rich 
exempted, will be a fruitful source of discontent. So 
will the food regulations. So will half a dozen other 
consequences of the war. From some of these causes 
spontaneous demonstrations and movements will 
arise ; but as spontaneous movements they will get no 
further. It requires great courage to throw part of 
the tiny forces of a revolutionary party into open 
organized demonstrations and actions on such ques- 
tions: the issue is always raised ‘would we not do 
better to start the fight on bigger questions?’ or 
‘when the masses are more thoroughly fed up,’ or 
‘can we risk the imprisonment of our active workers 
before we get more members?’ But when there 
really begin to be spontaneous movements of any 
size those who want to end war must be part of these 
movements, must organize them, and will find that 
the risks taken are well repaid. 

In the factories, questions of safety are often the 
key to the first actions of the workers. Much war 
work is very dangerous: in hastily erected factories, 
at unfenced machinery, men and women are 
speeded-up to the limits of physical endurance. Work 
in the chemical factories, producing explosives and 
poison gases, is particularly dangerous. In Edge- 


A ai a 


wood poison-gas arsenal, U.S.A., during the last | 


seven months of 1918, there were 925 casualties— ` 


deaths or injuries requiring hospital treatment. In 
British poison-gas factories the ‘accidentally burned 
153 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


and blistered exceeded 100 per cent. of the staff 
every three months,’ according to Winston Churchill.* 
‘Patriots’ exasperated by the wastage implied in this, 
and trade unionists refused any say in improving 
such conditions, will help the organizers of strikes 
on such issues. 

From the pressure of such movements, or from 
military defeat, or failure of the food supplies, will 
come a time when it is possible, if all available forces 
are gathered, to end the power of the war govern- 
ment—which has ceased entirely to represent any 
large section of the people—and to establish a 
workers’ government. ‘Peace without annexations 
or indemnities, the land and factories for those who 
work them, bread . . .’—we do not know what 
development or addition to these slogans of 1917 
will be the programme of this government. (But the 
programme is likely to be more progressive than that 
of the government which the leaders of the Con- 
servative Party fostered in Belfast in 1914.) This 
government and the forces putting it into power will 
then have the choice between the path through 
struggle to Socialism, or that through compromise 
with the ruling class to a parliamentary republic and 
its natural sequels, Fascism and further wars. They 
will remember the way in which the Russian and 
the German revolutions—the movements that ended 
the war—developed in different directions. 


* The World Crisis, 1916-1918, p. 482. 


154 


CHAPTER VIII 
LABOUR AND WAR 


Ir has been one of the essential things in Socialism 
during the whole of its existence as a modern system 
of ideas, believed by almost all its sects and parties, 
that the solidarity of those who suffer from capital- 
ism ought to be international, and that no support 
should be given to any war carried on by a capitalist 
government. 

This is not a ‘foreign’ doctrine; it was developed 
by Chartists and given full expression in the Inter- 
national Working Men’s Association formed:‘in 1864 
by London trade union leaders, old Chartists and 
followers of Robert Owen—with some French and 
German representatives and Karl Marx. The 
General Council of this, the First International, 
seems to have contained a majority of British mem- 
bers throughout its effective life. Later a great 
Socialist who was also an Englishman of the English 
wrote that the duty of a Socialist was: 


‘To further the spread of international feeling 
between the workers by all means possible; to point 
out to our own workmen that foreign competition 
and rivalry, or commercial war, culminating at last 
in open war, are necessities of the plundering classes ; 
and that the race and commercial quarrels of these 
classes only concern us so far as we can use them as 


155 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


opportunities for fostering discontent and revolu- 
tion ; that the interests of the workmen are the same 
in all countries, and they can never be really enemies 
of each other.’ 


These were the words of William Morris, in his 
paper, The Commonweal (January 1, 1887). They 
were echoed by almost every section of the move- 
ment—until August 7, 1914. Into the change that 
then took place we need not enter. The Labour 
Party, the movement as a whole with a few indi- 
vidual exceptions, ‘rallied to the support of the cause 
of the Allies with practical unanimity.’"* Imme- 
diately after the war it was seen that this was, to say 
the least, a mistake, if not a betrayal; the line of the 
Labour Party was laid down in its resolution of 1922: 


‘That this Conference is of opinion that the Social- 
ists and Labour Parties of all nations should agree to 
oppose any war entered into by any Government, 
whatever the ostensible object of the war, and ask 
the Labour Party Delegates to bring forward this 
policy at the next International Socialist Congress.’ 


At the founding of the Labour and Socialist Inter- 
national at Hamburg in May 1923 a resolution was 
passed declaring: 


‘This struggle of the international working class 
against imperialist policy will be most effective if 
Labour everywhere fights against the imperialism 
and capitalism of its own country, with all Parlia- 
mentary and a e means at its dis- 
posal for the class struggle. . .. The first requirement 

* Max Beer, History of British Socialism, London, 1920, Vol. i, 


P- 383. 
156 


LABOUR AND WAR 


of this struggle is that the Labour and Socialist 
Parties of all countries refuse all support to an 
imperialist war, and that their Parliamentary repre- 
sentatives in accordance with this attitude, withhold 
their consent to military or war credits having 
imperialist objects.’ 


This remained the official attitude and 4 policy of 
the Labour leaders until 1934. These may have had 
no more solid basis than the similar resolutions 
passed before 1914; they may have been illogical or 
ill-phrased in parts; but the resolutions and speeches 
up till 1933 were a definite recognition of a thing 
that matters: the trade unionists and Socialists of 
this country are against any support for a capitalist 
war, ‘whatever the ostensible object of the war.’ 

In 1933 the Labour Party again ‘pledged itself to 
take no part in war and to resist it with the whole 
force of the Labour movement.’ At the Trades 
Union Congress, in that year, a resolution was 
passed demanding : 


(1) An uncompromising attitude against war pre- 
parations. 

(2) A determined boycott of war if and when it 
should be declared. 

(3) An organized refusal to assist in any shape or 
form in measures calculated to help in the prosecution 
of the war. 


W. Monslow, A.S.L.E. and F., the mover of the 
resolution, said : 


' ‘One had to remember that in all wars “in defence 
of one’s country,” both sides said the same thing. 


157 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


That had been the popular cry in relation to war up 
to the present moment. He believed that the last 
war had proved the unreality of that romantic 


appeal.’ 
Supporting the resolution, G. M. Hann, Shop 
Assistants, said: 


‘The last portion of the resolution was the all- 
important portion. It committed Congress to 
organized refusal to assist, in any shape or form, 
measures calculated to help in the prosecution of the 
war.” 


While this was the policy officially stated from 
1922 to 1933, the two Labour governments of 1924 
and 1929-31 made no attempt to carry out this 
policy or to go further with disarmament. Nor did 
they try to arm (as an alternative to disarmament) 
the mass of the people, and abolish the gap that 
separates the standing army, completely controlled 
by officers soaked in capitalist ideas, from the 
working class. The idea that such a separation 
should not exist was voiced by many of the Whigs 
during the latter part of the eighteenth century ;* it 
was too radical for the Labour Party in 1929. Pro- 
gress in political thinking is relative. 

On disarmament the myth was proclaimed, by 
these Labour governments, that Britain alone had 

* Blackstone, the Whig theoretician who is recognized as the 
greatest exponent of the fundamental constitutional laws of this 
country, wrote that a standing army is unconstitutional (Commen- 
taries, 1, pp. 413, 414). War armies were ‘to be looked upon only as 
temporary excrescences bred out of the distemper of the State, and 


not as any part of the permanent and perpetual laws of the King- 
dom’ (Commentaries, I, p. 412). 


158 


ae m ee Md 


ap Sie. ates 


LABOUR AND WAR 


disarmed, ‘unilaterally... Tom Shaw, Secretary for 
War in the second Labour Government (and ex- 
secretary of the Second International) said: 


‘It is impossible, in the circumstances, for me to 
recommend any further unilateral disarmament. 
The figures are against it. Experience is against it. 
And in my opinion the chances of peace and disarma- 
ment are against it.” (House of Commons debate on 
Army Estimates, March 10, 1931.) 


On March 17, 1931, the Tory ex-Minister for Air, 
Sir Samuel Hoare, ‘congratulated the (Labour) 
Under-Secretary upon continuing, without any 
breach of continuity, the programme of air develop- 
ment, military and civil, which he found in existence 
when he went to the Air Ministry.’ 

In Labour’s policy up to 1933, then, there were 
these two elements: working-class pressure and ' 
official resolutions for disarmament, for action 
against war—and capitalist pressure, official action 
as governments, against disarmament, for ‘con- 
tinulty’ in war preparations. 

In 1934 the bubble burst. The Labour Party 
leaders, conscious of the nearness of war and con- 
scious also that widespread antagonism to the 
National Government might soon make possible a 
third Labour Government, forced through the 
Labour Party Conference at Southport a resolution 
pledging Labour to support war against a ‘peace- 
breaker’ ! 

In this resolution, ‘Socialism and Peace,’ three 
main points are laid down: by a proposed ‘Peace 


159 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Act’: (i) Great Britain would be bound not to resort 
to force as an instrument of national policy; (ii) she 
must comply with instructions from the League of 
Nations, ‘in case of having to use force in self- 
defence’ ; (iii) the Labour Party ‘must unflinchingly 
support our Government in all the risks and conse- 
quences of fulfilling its duty to take part in collective 
action against a peace-breaker’; this means being 
prepared militarily and financially to join in such 
‘collective action”! 

This policy is stated as a necessary part of a settle- 
ment of the world by ‘collective security.’ A Labour 
government, says the Southport decision, would pro- 
pose to all nations at Geneva a bold plan for dis- 
armament and for international organization of 
security, based upon (i) abolition of all arms for- 
bidden to Germany under the Versailles Treaty, of 
air forces, etc. ; (ii) a non-aggression treaty; (ili) the 
settlement of disputes by pacific means. 

This ‘collective peace system,’ it is explained in a 
memorandum accompanying the resolution (Report 
to Southport Conference, p. 101) means the League of 
Nations plus any other States which agree to co- 
operate with it. ‘Labour’s policy is directed to 
developing the collective system in such a way as to 
make it a sure guarantee of peace.’ That is to say, 
a sure guarantee of peace could come out of co-opera- 
tion between the fifty or sixty capitalist and imperial- 
ist States in the world, plus the one State where the 
workers are the ruling class—the U.S.S.R.—plus 
Britain under a Labour government (where Lords 
Melchett and Londonderry, the bankers and the 
160 


LABOUR AND WAR 


ship-owners, would still be the ruling class, but 
which would not be imperialist because Herbert 
Morrison, instead of Ramsay MacDonald, had 
kissed the King’s hands). 

And under this system, the memorandum states 
(p. 103), it would be possible to distinguish between 
a war of an aggressive character and one undertaken 
in defence of the collective peace system: 


‘Labour is emphatically opposed to any form of 
aggressive war, but we recognize that there might be 
circumstances under which the Government of Great 
Britain might have to use its military and naval 
forces in support of the League in restraining an 
aggressor nation which declined to submit to the 
authority of the League and which flagrantly used 
military measures in defiance of its pledged word.’ 


What is the League? Fifty-nine capitalist govern- 
ments and one Soviet government. The League’s 
‘action or inaction at any given moment is the resul- 
tant of the policies of the Government members of 
the League, especially the most influential Govern- 
ments. And no Government has more influence at 
Geneva than the British,’ says this Labour Party 
memorandum. Action ‘in support of the League’ 
therefore means actilon—war—1in support of a body 
representing in the main capitalist governments, 
first among them our own. 

Contrast these quotations with a speech by John 
McGovern, M.P., a member of the Independent 
Labour Party, made in the House of Commons in 
opposition to the Sedition Bill, and reflecting the 

L 161 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


feeling of millions opposed to this Bill, which was 
one among the many measures preparatory to war 
passed in 1934: 


‘The Government, which is composed of ship- 
owners, coal-owners, royalty owners, railway direc- 
tors and bond-holders, every single capitalist interest, 
uses these troops to defend their ill-gotten gains, and 
we are not to be allowed to appeal to these working 
classes and say, “Do not allow the ruling class to 
use your bodies to defend their selfish interests.” On 
every occasion I appeal to the working classes to 
take no part in your vile wars, but to defend the 
interests of the working classes against those of the 
ruling class. | 

‘I make no apology for it. This is a struggle of the 
working classes against the ruling classes. 

‘Your Army and Navy and your Air Force are not 
to defend the interests of the common people, but to 
defend your selfish class interests, your right to plun- 
der, exploit and rob them, to defend bond-holders, 
your armament rings, and the interests of “‘Society.”’ 
And I am told that I must not appeal to the working 
classes not to be used in this matter.’ 


Here are two different conceptions of war and of 
society. In one conception there is a united, ‘col- 
lective’ world—the Labour leaders even write of it 
as a ‘World Commonwealth of Nations,’ consisting 
of capitalist States!—bound together to resist a 
‘peace-breaker.” In the other there is a world 
divided by class war, in which ‘defence’ means 
primarily defence of ruling class property. These 
two views clash within the whole Labour movement. 
162 


LABOUR AND WAR 


But this movement is only democratic in appear- 
ance: it is controlled in fact by methods well 
known—block vote, expulsion of militants, refusal to 
accept amendments to official resolutions—by a 
closed group of leaders.* These leaders have used 
their normal methods to change the Labour Party’s 
avowed policy from one of opposition to all war to 
one of support for war ‘against a peace-breaker.’ 
_ The importance of this change in policy cannot be 
overstressed. It means that war is near—since 
otherwise the Labour leaders would not take the 
risk of widening the gap between themselves and 
the bulk of their followers—and it means that in this 
war the official machinery of the Labour movement 
will be at the disposal of whatever government 
(National, Labour, or Coalition) wages that war. 
For it is always easy to make this war appear a war 
against the foreign ‘peace-breaker,’ a war for ‘col- 
lective security,’ a war for peace. 

To this end develop all the trends of pacifism and 
of reformist opposition to war that are not bound up 
into a positive movement, fighting, in spite of the 
Labour leaders’ bans, against all war preparations 
now. 

The policy of a general strike against war is 
officially abandoned. This policy was at all times 
something of a myth, a promise of future action 
unsupported by any real preparations for this action. 
But it was a myth that embodied the very solid 


* ‘In practice, the Parliamentary Labour Party controls the party 
organization.’—Egon Wertheimer, London correspondent of Vor- 
warts, in Portrait of the Labour Party, London, 1929. 


163 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


feeling of the trade unionists who are the best forces 
of the British working class: that their unions must 
be able to stop war. The policy was abandoned, 
according to the official statement, because: 


‘It was recognized that the lack of an independent 
Trade Union Movement in such countries as Ger- 
many, Italy, Austria and others, made the calling of 
a General Strike against their Governments an 
impossibility ; and in other countries, such as Japan, 
the weakness of the Trade Union organization made 
it unable to restrain its Government. 

‘Recognizing that aggressive action might come 
from some of these countries, the statement declared 
that the General Strike in such circumstances could 
not possibly be made effective by the trade unions in 
these countries; the responsibility for stopping war, 
moreover, ought not to be placed on the Trade 
Union Movement.’ 


In Germany, Italy and Austria the forces of trade 
unionism have been led to defeat, and a position in 
which they can only work illegally, by reformist 
leaders. ‘Therefore, say the colleagues of these 
leaders here, pursuing the same policies as in Ger- 
many, let us accept defeat beforehand ; let us take no 
responsibility for stopping war. 

If, then, much of the propaganda for peace actually 
helps the war-makers, how can we distinguish 
between this propaganda and the ideas and actions 
that can really stop the war-makers, or hamper 
them? | 


‘The friends of peace in bourgeois circles’ (wrote 
Rosa Luxemburg a generation ago) ‘believe that 
164 


LABOUR AND WAR 


world peace and disarmament can be realized within 
the framework of the present social order, whereas 
we, who base ourselves on the materialistic concep- 
tion of history and on scientific socialism, are con- 
vinced that militarism can only be abolished from 
the world with the destruction of the capitalist class 
state. . . . The bourgeois friends of peace are 
endeavouring—and from their point of view this is 
perfectly logical and explicable—to invent all sorts 
of ‘practical’ projects for gradually restraining 
militarism, and are naturally inclined to consider 
every outward apparent sign of a tendency towards 
peace as the genuine article, to take every expression 
of the ruling diplomacy in this vein at its word, to 
exaggerate it into a basis for earnest activity. The 
Social-Democrats,* on the other hand, must con- 
sider it their duty in this matter just as in all matters 
of social criticism, to expose the bourgeois attempts 
to restrain militarism as pitiful half measures and 
the expressions of such sentiments on the part of 
governing circles as diplomatic make-believe, and to 
oppose the bourgeois claims and pretences with the 
ruthless analysis of capitalist reality.’ t 


The kernel of the Social-Democratic (i.e. revolu- 
tionary) idea about war, continued Rosa Luxem- 
burg, was that: 


‘Militarism in both its forrns—as war and as armed 
peace—is a legitimate child, a logical result of 


* By ‘Social-Democrats’ was meant revolutionary socialist. In 
1911 no Communist Parties existed. Words change their meaning 
when people change their faiths. 

t Rosa Luxemburg, articles in the Leipziger Volkszeitung, May 6 
and 8, 1911; English translation, abridged, in Labour Monthly, 
July 1926. 

165 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


capitalism, which can only be overcome with the 
destruction of capitalism, and that hence whoever 
honestly desires world peace and liberation from the 
tremendous burden of armaments must also desire 
Socialism. Only in this way can real Social-Demo- 
cratic enlightenment and recruiting be carried on in 
connection with the armaments debate. 

‘This work, however, will be rendered somewhat 
difficult and the attitude of the Social-Democrats 
will become obscure and vacillating if, by some 
strange exchange of rôles, our Party tries on the con- 
trary to convince the bourgeois state that it can quite 
well limit armaments and bring about peace, and 
that it can do this from its own standpoint, from that 
of a capitalist class state.’ | 


The essential thing about most of the work of our 
friends the pacifists, and those of the Labour Party 
who really want peace, is that it consists of an 
endeavour ‘to convince the bourgeois State’* The 


* This is the main effort of those pacifists who are really concerned 
about war. But there are other pacifists who seem mainly concerned 
about revolution. One of them, Mr. C. E. M. Joad, has written in 
á pamphlet published by the ‘No More War’ Movement stating that 
he did not believe ‘that, even if a revolution were able to achieve an 
economic millennium and did in fact achieve it, the result would be 
worth the price in human misery and suffering that it would involve. 
Thus, I have learned to curb my expectations and to modify m 
demands in respect of the future of our society. Socialism I sti 
think good, but I am less certain that it is realizable than I used 
to be. In many moods I am inclined to think that the Marxians are 
right in holding that the difficulties involved in the supersession of 
capitalism are too great to be overcome without a violent struggle, 
and this violent struggle it seems to me essential at all costs to avoid. 
If its avoidance means that Socialism must be regarded as imprac- 
ticable, then we must get on without it as best as we can.’ (What 
Fighting Means, p. 20.) 

Capitalism means war, growing more and more murderous and 
destructive. Socialism, which is a state of society without classes or 


166 


LABOUR AND WAR 


essential thing about the work of those who want 
peace must be the attempt to convince the working 
class of their power to end the bourgeois State, 
thereby ending war. 

All the suggestions, even when they have behind 
them a real and vigorous hatred of war, for a rebirth 
of the League of Nations, for an international police 
force, for new pacts of security and disarmament 
between the great Powers, come in the former 
category; they are attempts to get each bourgeois 
government, organizers of bourgeois States, to act 
against the needs of each bourgeois class, and main- 
tain peace in the world when the antagonistic classes 
they represent are out for war. 

The most interesting arguments against Marxism 
put forward in this country come—directly or 
indirectly—from the Fabians, the more open expo- 
nents of the policy of ‘convincing the bourgeois 


exploitation, without any of the causes of war, is seen to imply a 
revolution—which only means killing and destruction to the extent 
that the capitalists have the strength left to fight it. And these 
pacifists choose—capitalism and war. These pacifists are not only 
against revolution; they are against the wars of subject peoples for 
their freedom from imperialist domination. They are against the 
determination of the workers and peasants of the Soviet Union to 
guard the Socialist State now building 

To the British workers they say: ‘Curb your expectations; give up 
the struggle for Socialism.’ 

To the Indian and Chinese peoples they say: ‘Curb your expecta- 
tions; give up the struggle for democracy and freedom.’ 

To the workers and peasants of Russia they say: ‘Surrender your 
Socialist cities to the first Imperialist Power that cares to invade you.’ 

They say these things ades a careful cover of morality, earnest- 
ness, piety, regard for ‘the sanctity of human life,’ appeals to the 
hatred of war that is rooted in the hearts of millions of workers. But 
what they are saying helps imperialism, and therefore helps the war- 
makers, even more than the usual pacifist talk of Britain as a peaceful 


country. 
167 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


state.” Their policy, applied with assiduity and 
great skill for some generations, has been a factor in 
producing the present state and present government 
of Britain, and has led directly to the existence of a 
Labour Party which has twice formed governments. 
These governments have proclaimed ‘continuity of 
policy’; in the colonies and in the struggle for new 
colonies they have done just what their Tory pre- 
decessors did; the first Labour government started 
an important phase in the present armaments race 
(the competition in cruisers) and the second Labour 
government carried on a ‘police war’ against the 
Indian people, jailing almost as large a number of 
its political opponents there as any other tyranny 
in world history has done (roughly as many as 
Hitler seems to have imprisoned). If we view the 
question simply as ‘practical men,’ therefore, Marx- 
ism in practice has more to say for it than Fabianism, 
since Marxism has to its credit a Soviet government 
that even Fabians must admit pursues a real policy 
of peace. 

The Fabians, however, are very active at present 
with a new—or refurbished—plan for securing world 
peace, an international police force. 


‘The international organ required’ (says one of the 
Fabian pamphlets*) ‘is one that has not to consider 
the immediate advantages of individual govern- 
ments, and will not be bound by the permutations 
and combinations of day to day national policy. 
There must be a judicial approach. The finding 


* H. R. J. Greaves, The Prevention of War, New Fabian Research 
Bureau and Victor Gollancz, London, 1934. ` 


168 


LABOUR AND WAR 


should be based not on a compromise between 
opposing interests, but on the conscious building up 
of a super-national technique. It is a disinterested 
body akin to the Permanent Mandates Commission 
that we want. Membership of it should, as far as 
possible, be independent of governments. Its per- 
sonnel must be authoritative. To assure this they 
ought to be chosen by the Council (under Article V 
and with the ad hoc membership of participant non- 
League Powers), to be irremovable during a seven- 
year term of office (except with the approval of the 
Council and Assembly), to be paid officials, to be 
forbidden any employment by governments or out- 
side bodies, and perhaps to be by majority nationals 
of other than great Powers. The lesson of the Man- 
dates Commission is that a Board composed on these 
lines develops an esprit de corps, a reputation for just 
and wise judgment, an authority generally recog- 
nized, and a valuable technique of international 
administration. Nor is it difficult to secure the ser- 
vices on such a body of eminent public men. The 
personnel of the Mandates Commission is evidence 
of that, and, taking into account the much greater 
importance of its work, it ought to be easy to find 
prominent international statesmen to serve on this 
board whose reputations would enhance its prestige. 

‘The task of the board—one might call it the Inter- 
national Police Board—would be in normal times to 
think out and prepare the methods of applying 
sanctions. It would maintain contact with the 
necessary national departments. It would organize, 
if that were decided, an international Air Force, 
deciding in view of its general plans where sections 
should be stationed, how they should be officered, 
and appointing the air chiefs. It would develop a 


169 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


system of co-operation between the navies of the 
League Powers, and might have conferred upon it 
the control of certain naval bases. Above all, its 
functions must be so divided that they can grow as 
the Board proves its value and shows that it has 
reached years of discretion. It would have its plans 
ready for the application of sanctions whether 
diplomatic, economic, financial or military. It 
would consider each country and each type of 
sanction separately, and devise the exact technique 
required in each case.’ 


In addition, it is suggested that all military and 
naval aircraft in the hands of governments should 
be abolished, civil aviation should be international- 
ized, and an air police force set up armed with the 
latest and most powerful fighting machines.* One 
of the most active exponents of this policy, Mr. 
Philip Noel Baker, was at one time Parliamentary 
Private Secretary to Arthur Henderson, leader of the 
Labour Party. He was later one of the Labour 
government’s representatives on the Assembly of the 
League of Nations, and later still secretary to Mr. 
Henderson when he was President of the Disarma- 
ment Conference. A practical man with experience: 
he has been a professor and member of parliament as 
well. But how ludicrous his main argument looks 
when you strip it to essentials: that a police force is 
possible without a government; that a police force 
thus miraculously produced—parthenogenesis is the 
technical term, I believe—would necessarily be an 


* Philip Noel Baker, ‘International Air Police Force,’ a chapter in 
Challenge to Death, London, 1934. 


170 


LABOUR AND WAR 


instrument of peace and order, not of aggression and 
tyranny: that the ‘civil servants’ appointed by 
various governments to control this police force 
would, in the best ‘old school tie’ manner, work for 
the good of the community and ignore the needs and 
policies of the governments appointing them. 
Stripped to these bare bones, the plan can be seen 
for what it is, the utopia of an idealist. 

We find the basis for it in the same book in which 
Mr. Baker writes. In a chapter entitled ‘No Peace 
Without Economic Security, Mrs. Mary Agnes 
Hamilton expresses exactly the view of police forces 
that is at the root of this scheme. She writes: 


‘Britain and every other settled country have 
established peace at home, safety for the ordinary 
citizen, and justice as between citizens, by the self- 
same method. That method is the handing over of 
responsibility for common safety and common order 
and justice—what we call “the peace of the realm ””— 
to officers and institutions representing a common 
law. This law has come into being by consent.’* 


It is 170 years since Rousseau wrote his Social 
Contract. It might have been difficult for him to 
know that the process he described, by which a 
‘common order and justice’ came into being ‘by 
consent,’ never took place, was historically untrue. 
But it is far more difficult, surely, for this lady who 
was educated in Germany and at Newnham to 
believe that what she describes ever happened, or 
anything like it. She must know that police forces 


* Challenge to Death, London, 1934, p. 267. 
171 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


were instituted, as a fact, for the protection of 
property and of the power of a ruling and exploiting 
class. 

This lady continues with a charming story of an 
attempt to sell her a burglar-proof lock for her front 
door: ‘I inspected it, and admired: as I was doing 
so, a policeman happened to pass by on his beat. 
Suddenly, then, it occurred to me that actually it 
was he who kept my house safe. ... What enables 
the policeman to do this for us is that we all rely 
upon him. We consent to his being there, as our 
guardian: he has our goodwill; he is our servant and 
representative.’ Idyllic picture! How many impli- 
cations it carries with it: the home counties, a 
smooth hedge, the familiar, friendly blue uniform. ... 

There was once a similar and equally charming 
picture drawn by the same author. It was the por- 
trait of a gentleman. I remember the beautiful 
phrase in it: ‘It is a face that has weathered storms 
and has kept straight on.’ The gentleman was praised 
especially for the fact that, by years of patient 
struggle, he had saved the British Labour Movement 
from Communism. The gentleman was J. Ramsay 
MacDonald.* Perhaps it was from this gentleman— 
and a few years ago he had no more loyal supporter 
than Mary Agnes Hamilton—that the lady acquired 
an apparent inability to remember that the majority 
of the population are workers, their wives, and 
children. Workers, who meet the police at Labour 
Exchanges and evictions, as protectors of the P.A.C. 

* Mary Agnes Hamilton, writing as ‘Iconoclast,’ in James Ramsay 
MacDonald, London, 1923. 

172 


LABOUR AND WAR’: 


or of the bailiff. Workers, who when they demon- 
strate peacefully in this city can see the whole police 
force of London, and reinforcements from the Home 
Counties, doing their primary duty—keeping the 
militant working class ‘quiet’—while a curious 
menagerie of ‘specials’ mix the traffic and look 
round, uncomfortably, for burglars. 

We do not wish to suggest that the desire for peace 
of these who advocate an international police force 
is fraudulent. We do suggest that their view of the 
nature of police forces is wrong in fact and history, 
contrary to all scientific socialism—and springs from 
a slightly ludicrous suburbanism. It is a view of the 
police natural to Hampstead Garden Suburb. But 
the world is not quite like that. 

In this utopia of the biographers of MacDonald 
and the secretaries of Henderson there are two 
dangers. One is that the efforts of many otherwise 
useful people may go in this direction, instead of in 
a direction that can lead to the ending of imperialism 
and of war. The second is that it may not be a 
utopia at all; a shift of policy in Britain could, at this 
moment, lead towards the establishment of an inter- 
national police board and of an international air 
police. But the organizations called by these names 
would be organizations set up to serve, to represent, 
to consolidate the power of the dominant capitalist 
Powers in Europe to-day. It would be a general 
staff for air warfare, and an air force established by 
the Great Powers. The law that it would administer 
would be the international law of capitalist imperial- 
ism, a law well described by a Chinese nationalist in 


173 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


the days before the Chinese Nationalist Movement 
sold out. ‘What is International Law?’ wrote this 
representative of a semi-colony. ‘It is an instrument 
for securing the privileges obtained from the weak 
by the powerful nations. The powerful nation has 
already used force or blackmail to obtain the privi- 
leges. It uses international law to secure them. A 
wolf and a lamb talking justice.’* This is what the 
‘common safety and common order and justice’ 
enforced by this police force would look like to the 
majority of the population of the world, the Indians 
and Chinese and Africans who are subject to imperial- 
ism. And even apart from these, the establishment 
of a body pledged to keep things as they are, unless 
alterations occur by consent, would be a threat of 
war against all those millions who cannot endure 
things as they are, from Belfast to Buda-Pesth, from 
Barcelona to Berlin. It would be, like the ordinary 
policeman, a servant of ‘the man in possession’ and 
no friend of the dispossessed, whether a race or a 
class. Its formation and assumption of aerial 
superiority would be resisted by every nationalist 
movement that is not a mere decoration to cover 
partnership with imperialism, and by every Power 
that is driven by capitalist needs to a policy of 
expansion or of ‘revision’ (i.e. forcing a change of 
frontiers). It might easily turn into the sort of inter- 
national police force that fought the Chinese people 
(practically unarmed) in 1900, sacked Pekin, and 
had the title of ‘Huns’ bestowed on it by the German 
Emperor. Or it might provide the camouflage for a 
* Wong Ching Wai, China and the Nations, London, 1927. 
174 


LABOUR AND WAR 


new ‘war to end war’ against Germany or the 
U.S.A. This is not our road! 

Another plan, on which much energy is concen- 
trated by those who feel a burning hatred of war, is 
that of the nationalization of armament manufacture. 
There is something peculiarly horrible about the 
armament trade, and an extremely useful literature 
of exposure has grown up recently around it.* The 
use of prostitutes and lavish bribes to get orders, the 
creation of war scares, and the arming of potential 
‘enemies’ have been fully shown up at the recent 
inquiry by the American Senate. 

A summary of some of the evidence given before 
this Inquiry has been made by the New Republic of 
New York (September 19, 1934). It shows: 


That representatives of American airplane firms in 
China planned to sell ’planes to the Hankow Govern- 
ment through bribery of officials. 

That the Electric Boat Company (of New York) 
has long been associated with Vickers, Limited, and 


* This literature is so thorough and so popular that I have not 
thought it necessary to include much material from it in this book. 
Interested readers should see particularly Merchants of Death by 
Engelbrecht and Hanighen, and the cheaper pamphlets issued by 
the Union of Democratic Control, The Secret International and 
Patriotism Limited. 

t Bribes, is the form of secret commissions and secret rebates, are 
common practice in many modern industries. Where combines and 
cartels are formed fierce competition continues within these trades 
by means of secret discounts, exaggerated payments for advertising, 
or alternatively the provision of free services, etc. When a deal is 
near completion, the innocent phrase is usually some variant of ‘that 
sounds somewhere near possible: how does the price split up?’ The 
salesman then ‘does his stuff.’ Municipal officials, when approach- 
able, I was taught by an efficient sales manager, need tact and a 
bigger ‘slice,’ because the risks are greater. A sidelight on what is 
sometimes called Municipal Socialism! 

175 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


that a stockholder and dominating factor in both 
firms has been Sir Basil Zaharoff, greatest munitions 
profiteer in history. Between 1919 and 1930, Sir 
Basil received in commissions $1,360,000 from the 
Electric Boat Company. 

. That until the World War, a third partner of these 
two companies was the Whitehead Company Limited, 
a British-owned Austro-Hungarian concern from 
which the German Navy obtained American sub- 
marine secrets, and used them against American 
merchant vessels. 

That Vickers, over the protests of the Electric Boat 
Company and apparently without the knowledge of 
the British Admiralty, has recently sold American 
and British submarine secrets to Japan. 

That during the Tacna-Arica dispute between 
Chile and Peru, it was understood that the Electric 
Boat Company would sell only to Peru, Vickers only 
to Chile, each company splitting its profits with the 
other. Thus the Electric Boat Company’s salesman 
at Lima could talk piously of the British intrigues in 
Chile, and Vickers salesman at Santiago of the 
American manceuvres in Peru. L. V. Spear, retired 
United States naval officer and vice-president of 
Electric Boat, writes Commander Sir Charles 
Craven, managing director of Vickers, on how to do 
business in Chile: ‘Graft is the real foundation of all 
South American business,’ adding that ‘at the last 
minute something extra is always needed to grease 
the way.’ 

That the Electric Boat Company and the Beth- 
lehem interests maintained a common bribe-dis- 
tributor for South America, Captain Luis Aubry of 
Peru. Captain Aubry volunteered to have himself 
sent as Peruvian delegate to the 1924 disarmament 
176 


LABOUR AND WAR- 


conference at Geneva to fight any move for the out- 
lawing of submarine warfare. 

That Germany, since 1925, has maintained sub- 
marine-manufacturing plants, certainly in Holland, 
perhaps in other European countries, and that it has 
manufactured and sold small arms to all of Europe. 

That Soley and Company, of London, sells vast 
amounts of munitions in all parts of the world, 
substantial portions of their supplies coming from the 
British Government. The amounts are so large that, 
as the head of the firm wrote, they could ‘alter the 
balance of political power in any small State.’ 


_ It is good to use the almost incredible facts of this 
trade to persuade those otherwise indifferent to take 
notice, and to generate the decision and will-power 
needed for struggle. But the suggestion that nationali- 
zation of these trades would alter matters, essentially,, 
is nonsense. Sir Herbert Lawrence, now head of 
Vickers, Ltd., was before the war engaged in ‘high 
finance’ ;* he became Chief of Staff to Sir Douglas 
Haig during the War, then went to Vickers. Would 
he find his powers and position altered by his 
appointment as Under-Secretary for Armaments? 
Would His Majesty be any less willing to honour a 
government official than he was to honour Sir 
Charles Craven? (Commander Craven received his 
knighthood just at the time when those despicable 
Americans were preparing to publish his letters, in 
which as managing director of Vickers he was a little 
less than discreet about ‘commissions.’) Perhaps if 


* See speech by Lord Hutchinson of Montrose, House of Lords 
December 8, 1932. 


M 177 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


the trade was nationalized ‘commissions’ would be 
less prominent—and ‘concessions’ would take their 
place. But nothing essential would be altered. The 
capitalist class would control their arms through 
governments (not always immune, I believe, from 
_“jobbery’) instead of through firms that, like Vickers, 
are in a different way, ‘national institutions.’ 

But it would take the profit out of war, say some. 
Nonsense! There is scarcely a big industry in exist- 
ence that does not ‘profit’ from war. There has 
never, in the whole history of the world, been 
profiteering on a bigger scale than in the British 
shipping industry during the last World War. 
Banking, coal, steel, shipping, food—these make 
profit out of war. To nationalize armaments alone 
would perhaps take excess profits out of war for a 
tiny proportion of the capitalist class, but would 
spread these profits over the whole class. It might 
even be a step towards war; Roosevelt is obviously 
contemplating some form of armament nationaliza- 
tion, with the aim of preparing his country for 
‘defence’ more efficiently than private capital can do. 

A score of other ‘plans’ exist of the same character. 
The same or similar arguments apply to them. All 
of them fail to deal with the facts of the modern 
world: with what war is, and its connection with 
modern technique and the way men get their living. 


178 


CHAPTER IX 
WAR’S ROOTS 


‘On the threshold of human history,’ wrote Friedrich 
Engels, ‘stands the discovery that mechanical motion 
can be transformed into heat: the production of fire 
by friction; at the close of the development so far 
gone through’—Engels wrote in 1878—‘stands the 
discovery that heat can be transformed into mechani- 
cal motion: the steam-engine... 

‘The generation of fire by friction gave man for 
the first time control over one of the forces of Nature, 
and thereby separated him for ever from the animal 
kingdom. The steam-engine . . . (represents) all 
those immense productive forces dependent on it— 
forces which alone make possible a state of society in 
which there are no longer class distinction or anxiety 
over the means of subsistence of the individual, and 
in which for the first time there can be talk of real 
human freedom and of an existence in harmony with 
the established laws of Nature. .. . 

- ‘All past history can be characterized as the history 
of the epoch from the practical discovery of the trans- 
formation of mechanical motion into heat up to that 
of the transformation of heat into mechanical 
motion.’* : 

Against this background we look at the modern 

+ Anti-Dihring, London, 1935, p. 131. 

179 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


relations between technique, productive forces, pro- 
ductive relations of men, and society, systems of ideas 
and of government; here we can find the roots and 
realities of modern war. 

The steam-engine and the technique based on it 
raised man from the level of a creature that lives 
mainly by using tools and animal power, and employs 
natural forces (fire, wind-pressure, water-pressure) 
directly and on a small scale, thereby altering only 
slightly the environment surrounding him, to the 
level of a creature that lives mainly by using 
machinery and mechanical power, and by the use 
of these can, eventually, control to a large extent all 
the physical conditions of his life. 

On the basis of the old technique, of sailing-ship 
and horse-drawn vehicle and hand-forged metal, a 
class of traders had grown up before the steam-engine 
existed ; they had taken power from the kings and 
nobles, first in one country and then throughout half 
Europe, developed machinery driven by water-power, 
and remoulded society on a basis of free competition 
and the exploitation of wage-labour. Capitalism 
came into being. The capitalists owned the engines 
and the machinery that steam made possible, and 
conquered the whole planet with them, partly by the 
power they gave for warfare, partly by the wealth 
they gave, partly by the cheapness of the goods they 
produced. 

In the competition governing production, trade 
and transport, within or between the separate 
capitalist nations, the owners of great masses of 
capital and machinery were always able to squeeze 
180 


WAR’S ROOTS 


out their lesser rivals: from this grew up monopolies. 
‘Normal’ capitalism grew into imperialism, which 
Lenin defined as 


‘Capitalism in that phase of its Adopen in 
which the domination of monopolies and finance 
capital has established itself; in which the export of 
capital has acquired very great importance ; in which 
the division of the world among the big international 
trusts has begun; in which the partition of all 
territories of the earth amongst the great capitalist 
Powers has been completed.’ 


In the pamphlet, Imperialism, from whieh we take 
this quotation, Lenin gives figures of ‘the enormous 
development of industry and the extremely rapid 
concentration of production in ever larger enter- 
prises.” Lenin’s examples of this are all pre-war; he 
wrote in 1916. He knew nothing of Imperial 
Chemical Industries, of the concentration of British 
railways into a few big groups, of the merging of 
British shipping lines. But every tendency he 
pointed out has grown to extraordinary proportions 
in the years since he wrote. This applies also to his 
second chapter, which describes how the banks 
become 


. . transformed, and instead of being modest go- 
betweens they become powerful monopolies dealing 
with almost all capital, and with almost all capital- 
ists (and small proprietors); and similarly dealing 
with the biggest part of the means of production and 
of the sources of raw materials of a country or of 
several countries. ; 

‘Then the domination of capitalist monopolies 
181 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


inevitably becomes, in conditions of commodity 
production and private property, the domination of 
a financial oligarchy.’ 


Lenin notes among the essential features of this 
oligarchy’s rule the use of falsified balance sheets, 
and a juggling of accounts among subsidiary com- 
panies. Kreuger was not a well-known name when 
he wrote, nor had the cases occurred that led to the 
‘Hatry Crash’ and the prosecution of Lord Kylsant, 
but facts have not failed to confirm his thesis. 

He notes that Britain, France, Germany and the 
U.S.A. own nearly eighty per cent. of the world’s 
finance-capital : 


‘Thus by this means or otherwise the whole world 
is more or less the debtor and vassal of these four 
international banker-countries, on which world 
finance-capital rests.’ 

Lenin then describes the part played by the export 
of capital in the creation of an international net- 
work of dependence and connections of finance- 
capital. 

‘In the old type of capitalism, that of free com- 
petition, the export of goods was the most typical 
feature. In the modern kind, the capitalism of 
monopolies, the export of capital becomes a typical 
feature. . 

‘The necessity to export capital comes from the 

‘‘over-development”’ of capitalism in certain coun- 
tries where (with agriculture backward and the 
masses impoverished) profitable investments are 
becoming scarce. 

‘F inance-capital has created the period of monopo- 
lies and monopolies bring with them everywhere 
182 


WAR’S ROOTS 


their own methods; the utilization of business ‘‘con- 
nections” for profitable transactions takes the place 
of open competition on the market. Nothing is more 
usual than to stipulate before making a loan, that 
some of it will be spent on purchases in the country 
of issue, particularly in orders for war material or for 
ships.’ 

That this is still the normal method of business is 
shown by the recent inquiry into the work of arma- 
ment firms, held by the U.S. Senate. And this 
inquiry also gave startling evidence of the division 
of the world between capitalist groups, which Lenin 
described as follows: 

‘The capitalist monopoly groups—cartels, syndi- 
cates, trusts—divide among themselves first of all the 
whole internal trade of a country, grasping the whole 
of industry more and more firmly. But in capitalist 
society, internal trade is connected with foreign 
trade. Capitalism has long ago created a world 
market.’ 


Each government backs its own monopolists, 
taking colonies to secure for them markets, cheap 
labour, and raw materials. Lenin writes: 


‘Colonial possession alone gives complete guarantee 
of success to the monopolies against all the risks of 
struggle against competitors, including the possi- 
bility of the latter defending themselves by means of 
a law establishing a State monopoly.’ 


The tariff wars and ‘quota’ restrictions of the past 
few years have carried these processes to their 
logical conclusions: a series of empires walled off 
against competitors. 

| 183 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Every process traced by Lenin continues, domi- 
nates more and more all economic life. Each of us 
living ordinary lives, buying the goods produced by 
huge monopolies because of the insistent pressure of 
advertising, or because other goods can only be 
obtained with difficulty, contribute to these pro- 
cesses. We eat the meat provided by Lord Vestey’s 
Anglo-Argentine combine, but when saying grace 
we seldom thank God for the fact that British 
imperialism has not yet lost control of the Argentine 
to its American rivals. We read the newspapers of 
millionaire combines, smoke their cigarettes, watch 
their films. We ride in or dodge from under motor 
buses owned by rapidly-growing semi-monopolies, 
and these are built by other semi-monopolies, 
and fuelled by Shell, the firm that carries on 
ceaseless war with the Standard Oil, throughout 
almost the whole world, for control of the world’s 
oil. 

Tastes and fashions are steered and spurred into 
the service of finance-capital. When the home 
market for textiles mattered most, our foremothers 
judged respectability by the number of flannel petti- 
coats endured. Later, when the export trade was 
developing, they subsidized missionaries to preach 
decency to the unclad. Now that industries must be 
fostered for their war value rather than for their 
economic effect, artificial silks (produced and dyed 
in factories adapted for—or from—the manufacture 
of explosives and poison gas) become the fashionable 
covering. In this and a score of other ways we take 
part in the processes of imperialism. We have to: . 
184 


WAR’S ROOTS 


these processes are the very texture of the life 
around us. 

In other chapters we have noted Japanese, Ameri- 
can, British and German aimsand efforts to secure for 
their own monopolists control of China, their desire 
for a market in Soviet Russia, their struggle for 
control of the industries of Central and Western 
Europe, their scramble for oil and other raw 
materials. All these realities of to-day confirm 
Lenin’s statement that modern war is the direct and 
inevitable outcome of imperialism, which is to-day 
the shape and nature of capitalism. 

Although this explanation of the cause of modern 
war has never been controverted seriously, there are 
many, even among those who are earnestly and pas- 
sionately opposed to war, who know something of the 
Marxist view and reject it. In a book by various 
authors, that is a persuasive and forceful attack on 
war and the war-makers,* an analysis of ‘the roots 
of war’ is made by G. E. G. Catlin, a professor who 
is a member of the executive of the Fabian Society. 
His summary of the Marxist view is that in war ‘the 
generous emotions of men are exploited by pecuniary 
interests, which derive profit from men’s mutual 
slaughter.’ This first sentence is only, of course, a 
summary which he expands and improves. But 
compare it with Lenin’s theory and see how dis- 
torting a summary it is! 

Mr. Catlin goes on to describe ‘economic imperial- 
ism’ by means of a ten-line reference to past wars 
and colonial exploitation. But at once: ‘to treat, 


* Challenge to Death, Constable, London, 1934. 
185 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


however, all colonial enterprise, all imperial rule and 
all wars as merely economic is not to tell the whole 
tale...’ i 

Marxists, we can reply at once, do not treat any 
social development as ‘purely economic’; they see 
economic factors conditioning or determining these 
developments. 

‘The chief objection to the Marxist explanation ’— 
continues Mr. Catlin—“‘is that it is not true. It is 
true as far as it goes—which is not the same thing— 
but it does not go far enough. . . . The economic 
interpretation of history . . . breaks down, as a work- 
ing explanation, when we are concerned with the 
causes and cures of war, because it fails to fit all the 
facts. It only fits those—certainly not unimportant 
—facts that idealistic histories have dishonestly 
ignored.” 

Mr. Catlin proceeds to argue that since wars are 
not economically useful even to the victor nations 
(not the ruling classes, but the nations), therefore the 
root cause of war cannot be economic! ‘Even Mr. 
Brailsford,’ he says, ‘who ably argues the Marxist 
case, in his brilliantly written book Property and 
Peace, has to admit that the capitalist assumption 
that military dominance through war issues in 
economic gain may be a cherished belief, an illusion. 
How shall we explain this economic illusion? The 
explanation, it would seem, must be in non-economic 
terms.’ : 

The explanation is certainly in terms that do not 
enter into the orthodox economics of Fabianism. 
Monopoly, finance-capital, class struggle—these are 
186 


WAR’S ROOTS 


categories a Fabian must ignore. Mr. Catlin cheer- 
fully concludes that the explanation of modern war 
‘must be sought in the psychology, not of acquisition, 
but of the “will to power” .. .* How then are we 
to abate this contest for power?’ he asks. 

After which Mr. Catlin demolishes the theory that 
war is ‘inevitably an inherent part of human nature’ 
—and begins his next section; ‘the grounds of war 
are psychological.’ How foolish of us to think that 
psychology had to do with human nature! Obviously 
Fabian psychology has no more to do with human 
nature than Fabian economics have to do with the 
relations between men in which they get their living. 

‘The remedy lies in placing this pride (pride of 
race) in perspective . . . we have to “think our- 
selves into” membership, not only of a world-wide 
British Commonwealth, but of a world-embracing 
organization . . . the unity of the world.’ 


* An interesting correspondence and contrast exists between the 
Fabian view as very roughly outlined above and the Fascist. Musso- 
lini writes in his Political and Social Doctrines of Fascism about ‘Marxian 
Socialism, the materialist conception of history; according to which 
the history of human civilization can be explained simply through the 
conflict of interests among the various social groups and by the 
change and development in the means and instruments of produc- 
tion. That the changes in the economic field—new discoveries of 
raw materials, new methods of working them, and the inventions of 
science—have their importance no one can deny; but that these 
factors are sufficient to explain the history of humanity excluding all 
others is an absurd delusion. Fascism, now and always, believes in 
holiness and heroism; that is to say, in actions influenced by no 
economic motive, direct or indirect.’ The correspondence is in the 
‘non-economic terms’; the contrast is in the fact that Mussolini, 
having been in some contact with Marxism, dare not misrepresent it 
so wholeheartedly as to make it a theory by which all actions are due 
to direct economic motives. There is a further contrast: ‘holiness 
and heroism’ and ‘the will to power’ are different views—approving 
and disapproving—of the same thing. 

187 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


And who is the ‘we’ who must thus ‘think our- 
selves’ out of war? The rulers? The oligarchy of 
finance-capital, from the Rothschilds to the directors 
of Vickers? These rulers know what they are, and 
not even the Fabians can make them think them- 
selves something different. 

. Perhaps such a reply to Mr. Catlin may seem too 
brusque. But Mr. Catlin, and the others who answer 
Marxism without studying the basic Marxist books, 
have only themselves to blame if we give their answers 
less than the due attention. 

The ‘will-to-power’ and the psychology of the 
ruling class—have Marxists dealt with such things? 
Of course they have, and in a way that directly 
exposes Mr. Catlin’s outline of their views as a dis- 
tortion of Marxism. Bukharin in his Historical 
Materialism writes that ‘class psychology is deter- 
mined by the totality of the conditions of the class 
life, based on the general economic situation.’ We 
should not ‘ascribe the class psychology to selfish 
interest, which is a very frequent error. No doubt 
class interest is the main sinew of the class struggle, 
but class psychology includes many other elements.’* 
He shows by examples from ancient Rome and 
Tsarist Russia that ‘class psychology is . . . not 
capable of direct interpretation as interest only, but 

* Nicolai Bukharin, Historical Materialism, London, 1926, p. 213. 

Mr. Catlin’s statement that the explanation of modern war 
‘must be sought in the psychology of the will to power’ means that 
there are no reasons discoverable for the development of this will, 
its fluctuations, its satisfaction during long periods with a policy of 

l progress,’ its insistence at other periods on a policy of war. 


Reasons for these changes exist and can be shown; there are causes 
for men’s psychological trends—even for Fabians’. 


188 


WAR’S ROOTS 


always to be explained by the concrete environment in which 
the specific class has been placed’ (Bukharin’s italics) ; 
or again Bukharin deals with the whole attempt to 
explain society and such social events as wars psycho- 
logically by pointing out that the psychological inter- 
actions in societies of one sort are different for those 
in societies of other sorts. ‘For instance in the reign 
of Nicholas I, there was a “‘spirit”’ of police violence, 
of subjection under the Tsar’s might, love of the 
traditional, while Soviet Russia presents something 
quite different, i.e., the psychical inter-relations have 
become altogether different. Psychological theories 
of society cannot explain this difference; here again 
the only scientific conception is that of materialism’ 
(p. 93). 

What is the ‘concrete environment’ in which our 
ruling class is placed? It is one in which capitalist 
relations seem not only ‘natural’ but beneficial, and 
beneficial not only to themselves but to the com- 
munity—which means for them the people of their 
own class, the professions, and the workers (they 
know the parasitic services and pleasure-industry 
workers better than the producers) who depend on 
trade and industry. Since Rhodes and Chamberlain 
and the collapse of Free Trade, a few years ago, the 
insulation of ‘their markets’ from foreign competitors 
has seemed to a growing number of the rulers of 
Britain of vital importance for this ‘community.’ 
This number has become a majority. They are con- 
cerned about India, about the colonies, about oil and 
rubber and markets for steel, and their concern is not 
necessarily ‘selfish,’ though profit-seeking reinforces 


189 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


it, gives power to it. They hate Bolshevism and are 
as resistant to any argument in favour of it as the 
Fabians. They have let their friends and relatives 
the landlords (and their minor allies of the market 
rings) ruin agriculture, and they fear the threat not 
to their own food-supply but to the nation’s that is im- 
plicit in French submarines and German aeroplanes. 

War is an evil; they know it, and fear it. Their 
spokesmen speak honestly when they proclaim the 
next war the end of civilization. Their philosophers, 
proclaiming the ‘Decline of the West,’ and their 
poets who see future and present as a ‘ Waste Land,’ 
reflect their minds. But their psychology is moulded, 
conditioned, determined by the basis of the civiliza- 
tion in which they live. They are a class: they must 
retain their class power or ‘go under.’ When crisis 
and deficits, repudiation of debt and unmanageable 
priceemovements shake down into ruin the plans 
they make for bigger, more rational, more powerful 
productive organizations, these men use parliament 
and press, the governments that they can break and 
the arms that they can buy, to safeguard at all costs 
their power. 

But the explanation of their action does not lie in 
‘the psychology of the will-to-power.’ It lies in the 
facts of class society and its development. And in 
these facts lie the roots of modern war. 

These facts are summarized in the resolution of the 
Sixth World Congress of the Communist Inter- 
national on ‘The Struggle Against War’: 

‘War is inseparable from capitalism.... As ` 
against the reactionary excuse that war is a natural 


190 


WAR’S ROOTS 


phenomenon, and the no less reactionary utopian 
schemes for its abolition by means of phrases or 
pacts, the revolutionary proletariat advances the 
rational theory of Marxism-Leninism, as the only 
scientific basis for a real struggle against war. 

‘The cause of war as a historic phenomenon is not 
the “evil nature” of mankind, not the “bad” policies 
of governments, but the division of society into 
classes, into exploiters and exploited. Capitalism is 
the cause of the wars in modern history. These wars 
are not exceptional phenomena; they do not con- 
tradict the principles of capitalism, of private owner- 
ship in the means of production, of competition and 
exploitation, but are rather their direct consequence. 

‘Imperialism, the monopolist stage of capitalism, 
sharpens all the contradictions of capitalism to such 
an extent that peace becomes but a breathing spell 
' for new wars. The surface of the earth and its 
economic wealth (with the exception of that part 
that is ruled by the proletarian dictatorship) is 
almost completely monopolized by a few big Powers. 
The uneven economic and political development of 
the various countries, however, again and again 
creates the necessity for a new division of the world. 
In the last analysis, this cannot take place except 
through wars waged by the decisive imperialist 
countries against one another. At the same time, 
however, the exploitation of the hundreds of millions 
of proletarians and colonial slaves can be maintained 
only by bloody wars of oppression.’ 


Compare the scope and completeness of this as a 
scientific summary with the theories of official bour- 
geois ‘science,’ the theories for example, of the 
British Ass—as scientists who care for their profession 


19! 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


sometimes call the British Association for the 
Advancement of Science. According to the President, 
Sir James Jeans, speaking at the 1934 meeting, 
science believes that ‘the pressure of population and 
the urge for expansion’ are ‘likely to drive the people 
of a nation to war.’ 

Parson Malthus has been dead these many years. 
But official science, anxious to clear itself of the 
charge that it serves war and the war-makers, 
returns to the long-derided Malthusianism of the 
first period of the Industrial Revolution. 

There are about 2,000,000,000 people in the world. 
They increase in number by about one per cent. per 
year—perhaps twenty million new mouths. But for 
these new mouths there is—or easily can be—new 
food. The harvests of all cereals increased every 
year, on the average, during the first quarter of this 
century, by four per cent. in Australia, nearly seven 
per cent. in the Argentine, and over thirteen per 
cent. in Canada. | 

To this the standard reply of the economist is: as 
the harvests increase, poorer land has to be brought 
into cultivation. Therefore more effort is needed to 
produce an equivalent crop, the cultivator’s hard life 
gets harder; there is, in effect, less to eat. Having 
‘said this, the economist feels that he has called a 
spade a spade. He has; he has also forgotten that 
what was done with spades a few years back can 
now be done by tractors. 

‘Wheat cut with a sickle and threshed with a flail 
needs thirty-five to fifty hours of work per acre; we 
can take the yield as fifteen bushels. With the binder 
192 


WAR’S ROOTS 


and threshing machine, the work per acre is five 
hours. With the tractor and ‘combine’ one hour’s 
work per acre is needed. And the yield is normally 
higher than fifteen bushels per acre. 

If by over-population, therefore, is meant a 
growth of population greater than the growth in the 
Capacity to produce foodstuffs, the theory of over- 
population is sheer nonsense. 

The late Lord Leverhulme estimated (during the 
war) that an hour’s work a week by each individual 
would be enough to support the population of the 
world in comfort, if the technique already practised 
in the most advanced factories and farms, transport, 
mines, etc., was practised universally.* There is no 
over-population noticeable in a world capable of 
such unendurable laziness. 

Any estimate of the population that the world 
could comfortably support needs revision every 
twenty years, so rapidly can modern technique 
advance. There are engineers in Soviet Russia now 
who spend evenings—as a relaxation after days spent 
not in looking for work but in developing half a 
continent as ‘an engineering job’—working on plans 
for draining the Mediterranean Sea and irrigating 
the Sahara desert. More immediate plans include 
development for wheat growing of parts of Siberia 
equal in area to all the wheat provinces of Canada. 
Perhaps even more promising, more worth effort and 

* The Marchese Marconi, a practical business man as well as an 
engineer, has predicted that by 1943 each of us will only need to 
work two hours a day. (The People, October 11, 1993.) It is clear 


that his practical understanding of the profit system exceeds con- 
siderably his theoretical grasp of it. 


N 193 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


sacrifice, are the proposals of scientists at a Soviet 
institute for plant genetics; these proposals aim at 
intensive ‘market-gardener’ cultivation of cereal 
crops. The method proposed, and under test on 
several hundred acres, is roughly this: seed-grain 
(sorted for quality) is sown mechanically, each grain 
alone, in specially prepared seed-beds. The young 
corn is transplanted into the fields as soon as it has 
got a good start. Naturally, transplantation by hand 
would be an impossible job. But a machine has been 
invented for this purpose and is being perfected. 
Each seed has the best possible conditions for early 
development; it does not have to struggle against 
several other seeds fallen on the same square inch of 
ground, it does not have to starve them to death, 
half-starving itself. It has moisture, chemical fertiliz- 
ers, even sometimes warmth supplied. The result 
is a heavier crop per acre, sometimes four times 
heavier than the normal. 

The adoption not of these new miracles but of 
normal modern methods of agriculture throughout 
the world, the supply of fertilizers from the nitrate 
factories now idle (or working on war explosives), 
the supply of tractors to India, China, England, and 
other countries where agriculture is primitive—these 
measures with a few years’ education of those who 
cultivate thesoil could doubletheworld’s food supplies. 

How strange it is that science—refusing to recog- 
nize that its own handiwork has changed, and can 
change more swiftly still, the conditions under which 
men live—science returns now to the drab infertile 
coverts of Malthus. They talk of population- 


194 


WAR’S ROOTS 


pressure when coffee and wheat are burnt every 
year, fish thrown into the sea, cotton ploughed under, 
ships scrapped, Lancashire spindles destroyed, fruit 
left to rot on the trees, and all the hopes and policies 
of those who rule are based on restriction of output, 
quotas, less food, less clothing, less machinery. There 
can, of course, be very real over-population in almost 
every country if these plans for artificial scarcity are 
operated long enough. But the surplus of people is 
not relative to the number who could easily feed, 
clothe and house themselves in comfort in these 
countries. The surplus is relative to the number of 
‘hands’ that a society of profit-seekers finds it 
profitable to feed. 

There are other theories of the cause of war; 
almost all of them are variants either of ‘over- 
population’ or of ‘wickedness’—which is often 
modernized into behaviourist or Freudian terms. 
Mr. Baldwin believes, as an English gentleman 
should, that breeding and instinct govern men’s 
actions ; he calls the cause of war a ‘fighting instinct’ 
which makes ‘for the preservation of the race’; Mr. 
Aldous Huxley, slightly more modern, traces it to a 
group of neuroses. 

Men that we can recognize as men undoubtedly 
existed on the earth more than 50,000 years ago.* 
War that we can recognize as war began somewhere 
in the transition from the Neolithic to the Bronze 
Ages, about 5,000 years ago. An ‘instinct,’ there- 

* For this period there is plenty of direct evidence. According to 
evidence less direct, the age of man may be between half a million 


and a million years. Sir Arthur Keith thinks the latter figure 
probable. (See Daily Telegraph, January 16, 1935.) 
195 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


fore (or a neurosis), that is taken as a part of man’s 

make-up, has only had the opportunity to flower 

into reality and action during the last tenth of man’s 

history? And there is no connection between the 

appearance of war 5,000 years ago, and the appear- 
ance of propertied groups? 

Havelock Ellis has written on this: 

‘There is not the slightest ground for supposing 
that the earliest men waged war. It is not done by 
any of the possibly related animals among which 
man arose, and very seldom indeed among any 
animals except ants and bees. And under the diffi- 
cult conditions of primitive life for a creature like 
man with so prolonged a period of infancy, warfare 
would render existence hazardous and perhaps have 
led to extermination. What early man needed, and, 
as we know, made, were tools. Weapons came later, 
and even then in the first place it would seem for 
hunting. 

‘If we turn to those still existing savages or uncivil- 
ized peoples who, though not truly primitive are 
doubtless nearer to early man than we ourselves are, 
it is the same story continued. Many have developed 
warfare, some of them, like the Caribs—and this is 
a significant fact—only in recent times, while to 
others it is unknown. But even among those who 
practise war, while among some it is already as 
ferocious as it has become between modern nations, 
among others a battle may not be a bloodthirsty 
event, and the death of a single warrior brings the 
war to an end, while, if the question of “reparation ” 
comes in, it is sometimes, very properly, the losing 
side to which they are paid.’* 

* Labour Monthly, October 1934, p. 627. 


196 


WAR’S ROOTS 


The argument that war is due to ‘human nature’ 
is only a generalized form of many abandoned 
theories. It seemed natural and eternal to a Greek 
historian that Athens and the other city states of 
ancient Greece should be often at war. It seemed 
natural, inevitable, to the Roman historians that 
there should always be barbarians on the empire’s 
frontiers who must be fought. To the ballad-maker, 
it was clear that there would always be raiding on 
the Scottish border, because of the nature of the 
reivers. To the present-day observer it is part of 
Chinese ‘human nature’ to wage endemic civil war 
(although Chinese human nature managed to put up 
with peace during several dynasties in the period 
before our era began, and even during quite a large 
part of the Christian centuries). 

Human nature, naturally, is a factor in every 
action taken by man. So is the presence of oxygen in 
human lungs. If a specific answer is desired to the 
question: ‘Why was the Reichstag burnt?’ it is 
possible to give the answer: ‘because of oxygen.’ 
There was undoubtedly oxygen in the lungs of those 
who burnt it. There was oxygen in the Reichstag 
atmosphere; without it no burning can take place. 
Obviously it is safe to blame oxygen—if you desire 
only to confuse the issue, to refuse an answer to the 
question. To answer the questions: ‘Why did the 
first World War occur?’ and ‘Why is the second 
World War near?’ by a reference to human nature 
is—as Professor J. B. S. Haldane has pointed out— 
like answering a question as to why a building was 
burnt down by a reference to oxygen. 


197 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Man is, of all animals, the one that alters its 
environment to the greatest extent. Indeed, men 
have created a large part of the environment in 
which they live. But the reaction between living 
matter and its environment (including other living 
matter of the same species or of other species) is 
never a ‘one-way street.” Environment, including 
those parts of it created by men, reacts on men, 
alters their natures. Therefore there is no fixed, 
eternal part of ‘human nature’ that we can call the 
cause of war. 

But, says the neo-Freudian, the present environ- 
ment of the civilized man—aindustrialism—creates 
neuroses, mental formations or malformations that 
predispose large sections of the population towards 
the emotional states that make war possible. And 
this is partly true. A war’s beginning is not a ques- 
tion of millionaire propaganda sheets infecting mil- 
lions of controlled, clear-sighted, rational human 
beings with the war fever. It is a question of this 
propaganda working upon populations largely dis- 
barred from all real education, stupefied by the 
opiates of religion and sub-literature and the glib lies 
of the film, scarred in mind as well as body by the 
crippling restrictions of their lives. This is so; what 
of it? We are no nearer to the root cause of war. 
Here is a part of the mechanism of the process, not 
of the force that produces it. ‘Industrialism,’ 
modern technique, modern productive forces as 
embodied in capitalism, tend to produce ruling 
classes that need war, ruled classes that—for a 
period—can be infected with war fever. In these 


198 


WAR’S ROOTS 


processes the psychologies and ideologies of these 
classes are necessary parts. But they are not domi- 
nant factors; they are only links in the chain. 

That chain of mingled and interacting causes and 
effects runs from the relations between men in 
machine production to the relations between men in 
machine war. Because it is ignored by the theorists 
of the Labour parties and of pacifism, the plans and 
proposals that they suggest for combating war have 
no solid link with reality, can achieve nothing useful 
in the world as it is—however powerful the desire 
for peace behind them. And theories or proposals 
that mislead millions help, in fact and practice, the 
war-makers who need smoke-screens for their work. 


199 


CHAPTER X 
GENERAL CRISIS 


THE general argument, capitalism means war, can 
be made more actual: the present phase of capitalist 
decay shapes and causes the almost-present second 
World War. 

With the first World War and the Soviet revolu- 
tion the capitalist world entered on a general crisis, 
a phase of decay. 

Capitalism has known crises before: in fact the 
economic history of capitalism is a history of cycles of 
boom and slump with crises of varying magnitudes 
at the end of each cycle. This general crisis is a dif- 
ferent thing: at this point the essential characteristics 
of imperialism reach full development and begin to 
change, in some cases, into their opposites ; capital- 
ism used to foster production and technique, now 
throttles them; used to live by the export of capital, 
now can find no safe place for these exports; used to 
bind the world more and more closely together—and 
now the world is split into two worlds, the capitalist 
countries, the Soviet Union. 

The Soviet Union exists. Its existence is a factor 
in the present crisis of a different sort, order, quality, 
to the factors in ordinary slumps. While production 
stagnates elsewhere, production here increases faster 
than ever it increased in America. While men rot in 
200 i 


GENERAL CRISIS 


idleness throughout the capitalist world, here there 
is lack of labour, a flow of peasants to the towns. It 
is no earthly paradise, this new land; it is an arena of 
immense struggles, birth-pains of a new civilization ; 
but it is a place of hope, of rapid advance towards 
fuller life, towards complete control by men over 
the forces and riches of nature. And it is the citadel 
of the new power, the class that can end crises, the 
workers who even in Britain begin to see—partly 
through Russia’s example—that it is absolute folly to 
restrict production, to keep men and machines idle 
for the sake of some idlers’ profits, when so much is 
needed and so many want work. That is a new 
feature not present in the pre-war crises. There 
has been a proletarian revolution; it grows in 
strength. 

Another new feature is that there is colonial revolt 
in every empire, but particularly in the British 
empire. Ireland has been waging economic war with 
Britain since 1930—war to the knife, and to the 
plate and fork. India looms over British politics ; 
every scheme of terrorism that terror can devise 
(called in the English way ‘constitutional reform 
with adequate safeguards’) is being discussed by 
Parliament; the need for a ‘gesture’ on the one 
hand, and of repression on the other, to meet the 
menace of this elephantine power, is in every politi- 
cian’s mind. Give concessions, or you lose India, says 
Baldwin ; give concessions and you lose India, replies 
Churchill: the old debate between sections of a 
ruling class facing the revolution. In Burma famine 
and fighting, in Africa ‘sedition,’ in China Soviets— 

201 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


these are new factors to complicate the ‘economic 
blizzard.’ 

What are these factors? They are aspects of this 
general crisis of capitalism, a change in the whole of 
the relations between the economic system of the 
world and the population of the world, a change that 
found expression in and at the same time arose from 
the first World War. This change we can sum- 
marize: ‘capitalism is breaking down.’ 

If the reader is willing to attempt an economic 
analysis of an aspect of this ‘general’ crisis he will see 
why from the nature of the facts there is no exit from 
it save by world war or revolution. . 

In the present economic system capital is used by 
those who own it in two forms, which Marx called 
‘constant’ and ‘variable.’* 

The fixed capital consists of money invested in 
machinery, factories, docks, railways, ships, etc. The 
variable capital is mainly money paid out as wages’ 

Capital reproduces itself continually, and on an 
increasing scale, in ‘normal’ times. The machinery 
must be reproduced and replaced (by better 
machinery) in some years’ time. The wages must 
also be reproduced—next week. Out of the proceeds 
of the sale of ‘his’ goods, the capitalist must set 
aside an amount for replacement of his machinery, 
and must also be able to pay wages till the next batch 
of goods finds a buyer. Also he must have a profit, 
over and above these, and from his profit and from 


* The whole process of the accumulation of capital and its neces- 
sary outcome in a ‘relative surplus-population’ is described in 
Capital, Vol. I, Part vi. 


202 


GENERAL CRISIS 


the profits of other capitalists, from credit expansion 
and from rent and various forms of interest, comes 
new capital for investment. ‘The additional capitals 
formed in the course of normal accumulation,’ says 
Marx,* ‘serve mainly as vehicles for the exploitation 
of new inventions and discoveries, or of industrial 
improvements in general. However, the old capital 
likewise arrives in due time at the moment when it 
must renew its head and limbs,’ (Marx means that 
the sums put aside for renewal of machinery or 
rebuilding of factories must be spent for these pur- 
poses) ‘when it casts off its old skin and is likewise 
born again in its perfected industrial form, in which 
a smaller quantity of labour suffices to set in motion 
a larger quantity of machinery and raw materials. ... 

‘The additional capital formed in the course of 
accumulation’ (i.e., mainly out of profits) ‘attracts 
fewer and fewer labourers in proportion to its 
magnitude’ (because as the years pass and technique 
grows more complex more, proportionately, of this 
new capital must be invested in machinery and 
buildings, less in wages). ‘On the other hand, the 
old capital periodically reproduced with change of 
composition, repels more and more of the labourers 
formerly employed’ (because the new machinery by 
which the old machinery is replaced, is more efficient 
and needs fewer workers). 

*,... With the growth of total capital, its variable 
constituent, or the labour incorporated in it, also 
does increase, but in a constantly diminishing pro- 
portion.’ 

* Capital, Vol. I, Chicago, p. 689. 

203 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


Marx thus described ‘normal’ capitalism. But the 
process described could only go on for ever if there 
was a fixed relation between the speed of accumula- 
tion of new, extra, additional capital for industry 
(the investment of which does employ some addi- 
tional labour) and the speed of the development of 
technique, which tends to contract the demand for 
labour as it replaces inefficient machines by efficient. 
' There is no such fixed relation. 

The electrical power stations of England are being 
‘born again’ at the moment. To replace the local 
power stations, scattered all over the country, each 
employing on the average a dozen men, vast new 
stations have been set up in which every process 1s 
automatic. At Barking current can be produced for 
a quarter of the country. And Barking is worked by 
fourteen men. No hand or shovel touches the fuel, 
raised automatically from barges in the river, fed 
automatically to the furnaces. The ash is dealt with 
automatically. There is scarcely need even to watch 
dials and to make adjustments, for temperature or 
power. The fluctuating load, that changes so sharply 
as the factories start or stop morning or evening, is 
automatically provided for; and if some change 
seems likely to go beyond the power of the apparatus, 
lights speak insistently to the engineers asking for 
their attention. 

It is almost impossible to comprehend how rapidly 
modern industrial technique has been advancing. 
The machines are taking over not only rough and 
heavy work but also the most delicate and subtle 
measurements. The grinding of curved gear-wheels 
204 


GENERAL CRISIS 


to correspond with complicated mathematical for- 
mule used to be a matter for very highly skilled 
labour: the workman would finish the last ten- 
thousandth of an inch on each tooth of the gear- 
wheel slowly and carefully, checking pitch and angle 
with micrometer gauges, or precision gauges that 
were kept at constant temperature, lest heat or cold 
should change their shapes. Now for a tenth the 
cost a machine will reproduce these gears with 
scarcely any attention, after it has been made ready. 
The cutting edges or grinding wheels of this machine, 
as of all others, wear down as it works; but the 
machine is equipped with fingers carrying electrical 
contacts more accurate than any gauge As the tool 
works it heats; when it is so hot it ‘needs a rest,’ it is 
withdrawn ; the electrical fingers feel how much wear 
has taken place, and adjusts the tool’s bearing for this 
wear. | 

Machines have grown hands. So our factories have 
the notice at their door: ‘no hands wanted.’ 

With the centralization of capital into the hands 
of vast monopolies, with rationalization, the closing 
of inefficient factories wholesale and the change from 
the simple machine (that must be guided, watched, 
controlled in all its actions) to the new machine that 
is fully automatic, technique has outstripped the 
investment of new capital. So that even in periods of 
‘prosperity, with rising production, the number of workers 
employed by the most advanced modern industry ts stationary 
or decreasing. 

In the U.S.A. before the present world crisis, 
production was increasing. The value of the total 

205 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


annual production rose from nearly 25 thousand 
million dollars in 1919 to nearly 35 thousand million 
in 1929. As prices went down during this period, the 
production can be taken as somewhere near doubled. 
But the number of workers employed decreased! In 
1919, it is estimated, the average number of workers 
employed was over nine million; in 1929 it was less 
than 8,900,000 (United States Statistical Abstract, 
1932). 

There is the clear sign of the process we have 
described. 

Wages rose during this period, and the total wage 
bill increased. But it increased much less rapidly 
than the total value of production. In 1919 the 
American workers, if they had spent all their wages 
on industrial goods, could have bought 42 per cent. 
of the goods they made. In 1929 they could only buy 
36 per cent. of these goods. 

The same process went on in Britain, much more 
slowly. Between 1923 and 1928 production rose 7.6 
per cent., employment fell 5.6 per cent.* 

Naturally, this means that less of the goods pro- 
duced by industry can be bought normally by those 
who are employed by industry. Hire-purchase and 
other forms of increased indebtedness, mortgages, 
etc., fill for a time some of the gap in the market. 
But when depression comes these debt arrangements 
increase its effects. 

As a result of these changes in the structure of 


* R. Palme Dutt, Fascism, London, 1934, p. 18. The first chapters 
of this book give the clearest statement yet published of the nature 
of the general crisis of capitalism. 


206 


GENERAL CRISIS 


capitalism, and particularly in what Marx calls the 
organic composition of capital itself (the relative 
proportion of constant and variable capital), capital- 
ism has ceased to be an expanding system of produc- 
tion, and is on the watershed that divides expansion 
from contraction. World industrial production 
ceases to expand normally. If the ‘usual’ rate of 
expansion (such as occurred between 1860 and 1913, 
during which period production was multiplied six 
times) had continued from 1913 to 1932, the indus- 
trial production of 1932 would have been more than 
twice as great as it actually was. ‘Independent esti- 
mates agree that in 1932 the level of industrial pro- 
duction in the world as a whole fell below that of 
1913. Meanwhile populations grow. 

It is an effect of this change in the relation between 
capitalism and mankind as a whole that the economic 
system becomes increasingly a fetter on technical 
advance, which could go ahead far faster than it is 
now going. And while the gap widens between pro- 
duction and man’s needs, the gap between the actual 
production and the productive capacity grows wider 
still, and more rapidly. 

The breakdown of the present social system does 
not proceed evenly everywhere. Some parts of the 
system have greater strength, some greater elasticity 
than others. Tsarist Russia had neither strength nor 
elasticity, and here imperialism broke at its weakest 
link. Since then in other parts of the world the social 
system has been remoulded into forms as inelastic, as 

* League of Nations’ World Economic Survey, 1932-33, p. 32. The 
relevant passages are quoted fully in Dutt’s Fascism. 
207 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


irrational and as fettering to every human desire 
as Tsarism ever was. Fascism arises, as a direct 
result of the breakdown of the system. A new atti- 
tude towards the unemployed, which is an essential 
part of Fascism, comes with it. 

Some years ago J. Ramsay MacDonald wrote: 
‘the order of society in which we are now living— 
the Capitalist order . . . cannot help classifying the 
wage-earner among its machines and its raw 
material and treating him as such.’* It was Mr. 
MacDonald’s achievement, recently, to carry this 
classification further ; he classified two million unem- 
ployed as ‘superfluous scrap’ (House of Commons, 
November 22, 1932). Not even machines or raw 
material now, but used, broken machines, waste, 
unusable material. That is what men have become 
in this last stage of capitalism—men six times as 
numerous, in Britain alone, as the inhabitants of 
Athens in its great days, days of Plato and Pericles, 
and immeasurably more able than these Greeks 
were to produce the things that are the material 
basis for a good life. 

From this attitude there is a straight road to con- 
centration camps for the workless and the other 
measures taught by Mussolini and Hitler and copied 
by MacDonald here. 

That is the first step in the ‘treatment’ of the 
crisis that capitalism is taking everywhere. The 
workers cannot be usefully employed in industry, so 
their labour-power is being sterilized, turned on to 

* J. Ramsay MacDonald, The Social Unrest: Its Cause and Solution, 
ae and 1924; see p. 100 in latter edition. 

2 


GENERAL CRISIS 


practically useless work or on to war work for a bare 
minimum of subsistence. 

What other steps are proposed? 

The sequence of boom and slump is sometimes 
compared, by supporters of the present economic 
system, to vibration in a machine. (No machine ever 
made by man could function if the vibration was 
such as to cause, at times, loss of half the effective 
output; but we will tolerate for the moment the 
comparison.) This vibration, say these economists, 
could be ‘damped out’ if parts of the machine were 
re-designed. Their plans for ‘ironing out the trade 
cycle’ have been in existence for many years, but 
have not been applied fully (and are not likely to be. 
used except as camouflage for the ‘corporate state,’ 
Fascism). This vast ‘vibration’ of boom and slump 
has reached the point where the machine jams and 
the metal it is made of melts. But the British Govern- 
ment has openly proclaimed that it will do nothing 
towards operating the principal item in all ‘respon- 
sible’ plans for re-designing the machine and ironing 
out the cycle. This principal item is expenditure, 
during ‘depression,’ on ‘public works.’ Mr. Runci- 
man stated at the World Economic Conference that 
‘We have terminated our scheme for dealing with 
the unemployed by capital expenditure works, and 
we shall not reopen these schemes, no matter what 
may be done elsewhere. . .. We are abandoning 
this policy once and for all’ (The Times, July 14, 
1933). | 

That, for a member of the National government, 
is an unusually clear statement. It is not contra- 


o 209 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


dicted by the government’s subsequent decision 
(November 1934) to give money for public works in 
the ‘derelict areas,’* since the small amount of 
money given (£2,000,000) makes it clear that this 
expenditure is only for propaganda purposes, and is 
not expected to effect any real economic change. 

Those who view this anarchy of capitalist produc- 
tion as a vibration to be damped out therefore tackle 
the problem at the other end. The policy of increas- 
ing economic demand belongs to the period of 
expanding capitalism and is now tabooed ; therefore 
the policy of decreasing production is relied upon. 
‘To allow production to go on unchecked and 
unregulated,’ says Neville Chamberlain, ‘when it 
could almost at a moment’s notice be increased to 
an almost indefinite extent was absolute folly’ (The 
Times, June 3, 1933). The goods men need could be 
produced ‘almost at a moment’s notice,’ but it would 
be folly to produce them—because, as things are, 
their production would cause prices to fall, profits to 
fall, worse economic crisis. 

Chamberlain’s admission that everyone could have 
everything they need ‘almost at a moment’s notice’ 
is worth treasuring for itself. But the point here is 
that the steps taken to end the present crisis are those 
which naturally fit it with a general process of 
checked, ingrowing, declining capitalism, not those 
that fit in with an expanding system. 

Another aspect of this process is the increased 
facilities for, and advocacy of, birth control. It is an 

* Recently the official term for these areas has been changed first 
to ‘depressed areas,’ then to ‘special areas.’ They remain derelict. 
210 


GENERAL CRISIS 


excellent thing that birth control should be possible 
for everyone who wants it; a terrible thing that 
childlessness should be forced upon millions of people 
by poverty. Those who advocate and work for birth 
control are usually trying to do the best they can for 
people here and now. But to advocate this method 
alone, or as the principal way out of the present 
poverty of the world, is to ask people to accom- 
modate their lives (at sacrifice of that which is of 
value to many) to the decay of a dying system of 
society. 

When capitalism was on the upgrade birth-control 
information was always difficult to get, except for 
members of the ruling class. Now that it is on the 
down-grade it is, in some countries, made easier. But 
the shadow of a new war, the need for cannon-fodder, 
makes progress this way slow. And in any case it 
cannot affect the crisis for very many years. By then 
what new madness and misery will capitalism have 
achieved ? 

Another aspect is that ‘birth control’ is applied to 
industrial inventions also; we are invited to go back 
to the ‘hand-made.’ But even if this ‘economic 
Malthusianism’ was applied on a far wider scale than 
it is at present, it would only speed the process of 
decay. Capitalism has entered on a spiral of increas- 
ing poverty, therefore narrowing markets, therefore 
again more poverty, therefore again less markets. 

It is natural that it should reach this stage when 
machinery gets to such a level that it can ‘almost at 
a moment’s notice’ increase the production of things 
needed ‘to an almost indefinite extent.’ It is also 

211 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


natural that this stage should come about at a time 
when the great imperialist Powers have a al 
their conquest of the world. 

This division of the world into empires was an 
integral part of the great expansion of capitalist 
industry and finance in the period of capitalist pro- 
gress. After the division of the world into empires 
comes a world war for re-division. The next stage 
is that the empires are armour-plated with tariffs to 
keep out rival imperialists’ goods. That stage, with 
its quotas and its customs barriers, is now nearly 
completed. The propagandists of ‘splendid. isola- 
tion’ wish to carry it further. But as its main result 
has been to cut down. world trade, it offers no ‘way 
out.’ Indeed, it makes the world crisis worse. 

It is easy enough for any ordinary person to see 
that, superficially at least, each wage-reduction also 
makes matters worse during an economic crisis, 
since purchasing power is reduced. But wage-cuts 
are enforced wherever it is possible ; the cuts imposed 
in 1931 are still partly in force; only the stubborn 
resistance of the working class has made it hard for 
this ‘way out’ to be followed. And economists, 
bankers, industrialists, claim wage-cuts as one of the 
necessary factors in ‘recovery.’ In its simplest form 
this idea was put before his fellow-Christians by 
Lord Hugh Cecil, speaking to the Church Assembly 
on February 7, 1935: 


‘It would be a remedy if you could reduce all 
wages by, say, 25 per cent., because then new indus- 
tries would become profitable and would soon 
absorb the unemployed.’ 

212 


GENERAL CRISIS 


It would be a remedy—for a class, for its profits, 
not for the people as a whole. 

Let us sum up the wisdom of our rulers: the way 
out of the crisis is that millions of men should work 
uselessly, that millions of those who work should get 
less for their labour, that the production of the 
machines should be cut down, that fewer babies 
should be born, that new inventions should be 
strangled quietly, that each great Power should be 
‘self-sufficient’ and fenced off from all others. These 
official ‘ways out’ are only paths sloping down slowly 
to barbarism, to the destruction of the machines and 
the rotting of the ships. But there is a quicker way: 
world war. And irresistible as gravity to a vehicle 
out of control, this pulls the capitalist world to-day. 

For millions of men to work—away from their 
own folk, away from their women—at useless, 
irritating, unending ‘fatigues’ goes against the grain, 
runs contrary to human nature. ‘You take a barrow 
full of sand,’ writes a man who is being ‘trained’ as 
a bricklayer at a colony maintained by the London 
County Council (which has a Labour majority), 
‘then the instructor lays a brick, and then he tells 
you to get on with it. After making a brick wall, it 
is knocked down again. Might learn in five years.’ 
(Report of deputation to Belmont, published by the 
March and Congress Council.) 

For each capitalist, or managing director, to cut 
down his production or find it throttled in a web of 
government regulations goes very much against the 
grain, baffles and infuriates those who have hitherto 
been taught by capitalism to ‘get on or get out,’ have 

213 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


been made callous and overbearing by capitalism’s 
approval. | 
To put off having children year after year—or to 
have them in utter poverty—cuts across what some 
feel to be the most powerful thing in human nature, 
the feeling of many adults for the young of the species. 
To live restricted lives, for lack of money, is hard; 
to have wages cut, lives still more restricted, is hell. 
For the most highly skilled section of the popula- 
tion, engineers, scientists, inventors, to see their plans 
‘ and discoveries throttled quietly—to see endless 
waste in the name of ‘economy’ and endless obstacles 
in the way of any advance—causes opposition, dis- 
trust, and fear to spread among the technicians. All 
this human opposition, this refusal of mankind to be 
dragooned into clipping their lives to suit capitalist 
decline, holds up these plans, makes them ineffective, 
forces our rulers to turn their minds (guardedly, 
under disguises, hiding the brutal reality sometimes 
even for themselves) towards war, towards ‘their’ 
country’s expansion at the cost of other countries. 
The pressure of discontent in each nation, of every 
ordinary man’s fear for his job in a jobless world, of 
every ordinary woman’s disgust with the childless 
house or the house into which children ought never 
to have been born, comes up as a threat to the 
minds of the rulers of each nation. And these rulers 
see and feel the threat vividly. Even a governor of 
the Bank of Engiand talks of the ending of capitalism. 
Even a Lloyd George or a Churchill sees that there 
is ‘something wrong’ when poverty spreads because 
of plenty. To counter this threat, to get a breathing 


214 


GENERAL CRISIS 


space, an outlet, a chance to plan and organize the 
world, without the interference of these damned 
foreigners—a bold policy, a strong hand, a refusal 
to be afraid is their plan. 

Courage and strength born of panic, and of a real 
despair as to the problems of the crisis, meet panic 
courage and hysteria-strength in other ruling classes. 
Kreugers and J. P. Morgans and the armament 
firms foster and feed each side with money and 
propaganda. From some new Serajevo—war. It is 
the certain outcome of all this. Except that one 
outcome is more certain still: men will not endure 
this much longer. All these factors that lead to war 
also lead, without war or through war, to make 
revolution possible. 


215 


CHAPTER XI 
REVOLUTION 


To restate the argument of this book: machines 
make war; machines, in industry and in war, 
develop; this development brings about a change in 
the nature of war; in the new form of war, power to 
make war and to end war is mainly in the hands of 
the industrial working class. In this chapter we 
complete the argument: power to make war and to 
end war is the essential thing in government. Govern- 
ment is now in the hands of a class that lives by 
exploiting the labour of others, by competition and 
monopoly ; it must and will pass to the hands of a 
class that lives by association in work, by the shared 
effort and the common aim. That is the revolution. 

The new way in warfare, we suggested in our 
first chapters, will be mainly war from the air; the 
new war approaching us will probably begin in the 
Far East, where war from the air may not at first be 
dominant, but it will stride to Europe and shatter 
cities there. In preparation for this war the rulers 
of this country are building an air force of excep- 
tional destructive power. And they are preparing, by 
their propaganda, to make war in the name of peace. 

In the seventh chapter we described the way such 
a war can be ended. But if we can, we must prevent 
it happening. The Labour and Fabian proposals for 
216 


REVOLUTION 


preventing war will not work; they are likely even to 
help the war-makers. War is inseparable from 
capitalism and cannot be ended by agreements among 
capitalists. The coming World War is being shaped 
and hastened by the general crisis of capitalism. This 
crisis also, at the same time, is a factor in the process 
that can prevent or end the war: the revolution. 

The proletarian revolution cannot be treated 
simply as a specific for war, a way to prevent or end 
a catastrophe that is near to us. It is the outcome of 
the whole of the development of class society, not of 
this aspect only. Marx summarized this develop- 
ment as arising from ‘the action of the immanent laws 
of capitalist production itself, by the centralization 
of capital . . . the conscious technical application of 
science . . . the transformation of the instruments of 
labour into instruments of labour only usable in 
common... the entanglement of all peoples in the 
net of the world market. 

‘Along with the constantly diminishing number of 
the magnates of capital,’ wrote Marx,* ‘who usurp 
and monopolize all advantages of this process of 
transformation, grows the mass of misery, oppression, 
slavery, degradation, exploitation ; but with this too 
grows the revolt of the working class, a class always 
increasing in numbers, and disciplined, united, 
organized by the very mechanism of the process of 
capitalist production itself. The monopoly of capital 
becomes a fetter upon the mode of production, which 
has sprung up and flourished along with, and under 
it. Centralization of the means of production and 

* Capital, Chicago, Vol. I, p. 836. 

217 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


socialization of labour at last reach a point where 
they become incompatible with their capitalist 
integument. This integument is burst asunder. The 
knell of capitalist private property sounds. The 
expropriators are expropriated.’ 

Within this massive generalization, that covers the 
whole of our epoch, there are smaller generalizations. 
One is that the ‘mass of misery, oppression, slavery, 
degradation, exploitation’ in the world mainly 
increases, during the middle period of capitalism and 
the beginnings of imperialism, by colonial wars and 
their effects: throughout three-quarters of the world, 
by gin and Bible, trade and gunboat, hut-tax and 
poll-tax and salt-tax, and the economic power of 
machine industry, the old almost self-sufficing 
economy of India, Africa, China, is destroyed ; ruined 
peasants or hunters are forced into mines and fac- 
tories; the landlord and the money-lender and the 
mill-owner grow rich from the ruin of primitive 
agriculture and village industry. On the basis of this 
exploitation of the colonies it was possible, in this 
period, for the conditions of a few million workers in 
Western Europe to improve slightly. But when 
imperialism has reached the stage of dividing up and 
“opening up’ almost the whole world, the world’s 
‘mass of misery, oppression, slavery, degradation, 
exploitation’ increases not only in the colonies but 
also in the favoured areas, in Western Europe and 
North America. And this increase comes through 
war, economic crisis, war again. 

The revolt of the working class against this 
increase in misery does not grow automatically or 
218 


REVOLUTION 


unconsciously, but through the development of 
scientific socialist theory, the growth of working-class 
parties, argument, meetings, discussion, the efforts 
to get reforms, to resist wage-cuts or the worsening of 
working conditions. This revolt expresses itselfmainly, 
before or during a war, in a feeling, not necessarily 
clearly shaped or politically directed, for peace. 

‘A mass sentiment for peace,’ wrote Lenin in 
1915,” ‘often expresses the beginning of a protest, an 
indignation and a consciousness of the reactionary 
nature of the war. It is the duty of all Social-Demo- 
crats to take advantage of this sentiment. They will 
take the most ardent part in every movement and in 
every demonstration made on this basis, but they will 
not deceive the people by assuming that, in the 
absence of a revolutionary movement, it is possible 
to have peace without annexations, without the 
oppression of nations, without robbery, without 
planting the seed of new wars among the present 
governments and the ruling classes. Such deception 
would only play into the hands of the secret diplo- 
macy of the belligerent countries and their counter- 
revolutionary plans. Whoever wishes a durable and 
democratic peace must be for civil war against the 
governments and the bourgeoisie.’ 

Along these lines the first successful working-class 
revolution broke out. It is with revolution from this 
aspect, as a way to end war, that we have to deal. 

The revolution is the use of the power of the 
working class, and of all allies it can gather with it, 
to establish a government based on ‘a special sort of 


* Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. XVIII, p. 235. 
219 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


class alliance between the proletariat (the vanguard 
of the workers) and the numerous non-proletarian 
strata of those who labour (petty-bourgeoisie, small 
employers, intelligentsia, and so forth) or the 
majority of these.’* That is the dictatorship of the 
proletariat, which Lenin translates ‘from the Latin 
scientific historical and philosophical setting into our 
own simpler tongue’ to mean that ‘a certain class— 
that of the urban workers, and in general the indus- 
trial workers—is competent to guide the masses of 
those who labour and are exploited to throw off the 
yoke of capitalism . . . to create a new social order.’ 

‘It is an alliance,’ writes Lenin, ‘between classes 
which differ economically, politically, socially, and 
ideologically.’ t 

This alliance sets up, secures, and works through ‘a 
State that embodies a new kind of democracy, for 
the proletarians and the dispossessed ; and a new kind 
of dictatorship, against the bourgeoisie.’ 


These quotations, not without value as authori- 
ties, are given at length because revolutionaries are 
considered, by the ignorant or the deluded, to desire 
a state of affairs without democracy or freedom. As 
these quotations show, the dictatorship which they 
desire is not dictatorship by individuals, by a party, 
or by a single class, but by an alliance of classes 
embracing all that vast majority of the population 
oppressed by capitalism. The relation of individual 

* Lenin, quoted by Stalin in Leninism, Vol. I, London, 1928, 

4 Salin, Leninism, Vol. I, p. 25. 

t Stalin, Leninism, Vol. I, p. 115. 
220 


REVOLUTION . 


revolutionaries, their Party, the working class, and 
the other classes, within this alliance, are summed 
up tersely by Lenin: 

‘Among the masses of the people, we Communists 
are but drops in the ocean, and we cannot rule 
unless we give accurate expression to the folk con- 
sciousness. Otherwise the Communist Party will not 
be able to lead the proletariat, the proletariat will 
not be able to lead the masses, and the whole 
machine will fall to pieces. ’* 


For these perfectly realistic reasons Lenin and the 
party he led insisted on the widest possible demo- 
cracy, the fullest freedom of comment, criticism, 
suggestion and action within the alliance, by the 
nine-tenths of the population who elect and control 
the Soviets. Stalin speaks of the Soviets as ‘the most 
democratic and therefore the most influential mass 
organizations’ (Leninism, p. 119). He speaks of them 
as ‘admitting the mass organizations of the workers, 
and the exploited generally, to direct and uncondit- 
ional participation in the management of public 
affairs’ (p. 121). 

And these phrases can be confirmed as facts by 
any unprejudiced visitor to the Soviet Union. 

Therefore those opponents of war who argue 
calmly: ‘dictatorships produce wars, therefore we 
are against all dictatorships, left or right; we are for 
“democracy” ’—are wise to refuse to argue further. 
Their line means in fact that they are for Ramsay 
MacDonald’s democracy, which is real for those 

* Stalin, Leninism, Vol. I, p. 51. 

221 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


with money or ‘a family,’ unreal for those without; 
they are against Lenin’s dictatorship, which is 
democracy for the mass of the population. 

There are many supporters of socialism and peace 
who feel, as Storm Jameson writes, ‘a certain creep- 
ing doubt’ whether the leaders of the British Labour 
Movement ‘really regard war as an unmitigated 
disaster... . Will they, in a war crisis, reveal them- 
selves less susceptible to mass emotion, better 
Socialists, than in 1914?’* But to some at least, 
probably to many who have these doubts, the revo- 
lutionary alternative seems as bad or worse. They 
are still under the influence of the fight put up by 
Ramsay MacDonald, before and during his leader- 
ship of the Labour Movement; they think of revolu- 
tionaries as dogmatic, sectarian and foreign. They 
think of revolution as unnecessary bloodshed. 

- It is time this was altered. It cannot be altered by 
blinking facts. Revolutionaries work now to estab- 
lish, before the clash of class force, the ‘peculiar form 
of class alliance,’ that is needed when the clash 
comes: they work for a united front of the working 
class and a common front with all other classes and 
sections of classes prepared to struggle against capital- 
ism. But the unity they seek and need is not to be 
established by hiding or glossing over policies or facts. 

A working-class revolution is the employment of 
class power to change the class that has govern- 
mental power. Because of temporary despair and 
division among the capitalists, it may occur without 
bloodshed, as in Buda-Pesth in 1919, when Count 

* In the Left Review, November 1934. 

222 


REVOLUTION 


Karolyi ‘handed over’ to the representatives of the 
working class. It may occur with less bloodshed than 
is caused by motor-cars, every year, in our British 
streets, as in Petrograd in 1917. But the class to be 
put out of power will fight when it can. 

The question raised by our consideration of 
Labour and Fabian plans for securing peace—can 
the Socialist Movement win peace by ‘convincing 
the bourgeois State’?—is really only part of the 
question: can the Socialist Movement win power 
by ‘convincing the bourgeois State’? The reasons 
why Marxists be:ieve this to be impossible were fully 
set out by Lenin in his booklet State and Revolution. 
In this Lenin traced the development of the theory 
of revolution in the writings of Marx, as the latter 
lived through and studied and played a leading part 
in the movements of 1848 and of the Paris Commune. 

After the Commune, Marx formulated the need 
of the revolution as ‘not merely to hand over from 
one set of hands to another, the bureaucratic and 
military machine—as has occurred hitherto—but to 
shatter it.’ 

But, argue some of those who now desire to be 
Marxists, when Marx was writing in the ’seventies of 
last century he suggested it might be possible for the 
revolution to occur peacefully in Britain and 
America. Kautsky and others have used these 
statements by Marx to ‘prove’ their point. 

Lenin in his pamphlet The Proletarian Revolution 
and Kautsky the Renegade, dealt with this (pages 20-22, 
1929 English edition). ‘The revolutionary dictator- 
ship of the proletariat is violence in respect of the 

223 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


bourgeoisie, and the need for such violence is caused 
especially, as repeatedly explained by Marx and 
Engels in detail (particularly in the Civil War in 
France and the preface to it) by the fact that there 
exists an army and a bureaucracy. But just these 
institutions in the ’seventies of last century, when Marx 
was making his observations, did not exist in England 
or America (though now they do exist). . 

‘Kautsky “the historian” is so shamelessly adul- 
terating history that he forgets the fundamental fact 
that capitalism of the pre-monopolist era, of which the 
*seventies of last century were just the highest point, 
was in virtue of its fundamental economic traits (which 
were most typical of England and America) dis- 
tinguished by, comparatively speaking, the greatest 
attachment to peace and freedom. As against this, 
imperialism (that is, capitalism of the monopolist 
era, which has finally matured in the twentieth cen- 
tury) is, in virtue of its fundamental economic traits, 
distinguished by least attachment to peace and 
freedom, and by the greatest development of 
militarism everywhere.’ 

Must. our revolution then be a ‘violent’ one? 
This question agitates the minds of many socialists 
and pacifists. And many of them feel that while a 
‘violent’ revolution might—if a choice must be made 
—be preferable to a world war, it is physically 
Impossible. A member of the Independent Labour 
Party, scoffing at ‘the people who talk of insurrec- 
tion’ has suggested that ‘those who take the bow and 
arrow will perish by the tank.’ Mr. C. E. M. Joad, 
at the I.L.P. Summer School in 1932, said that: 
224 


REVOLUTION 


‘Should a revolutionary situation arise to-day the 
wealthy classes would fight . . . and they would cer- 
tainly win. 

‘Modern science, applied to military technique, 
concentrates effective power in fewer and fewer 
hands. At the moment power rests with the Air 
Force. 

‘The Air Force could bomb a camp of unemployed, 
a concentration of strikers, or marching revolu- 
tionaries, out of existence in ten minutes.’ 


As we have already seen in previous dhapieis the 
effect of modern science applied to military technique 
is not in accordance with Mr. Joad’s fears (or 
hopes?). Its main effect has been to cause an in- 
creased dependence of the weapon on the factory, 
since armies and air forces need a continual flow of 
weapons and munitions. 

But before this question of modern weapons and | 


insurrection is dealt with, questions of policy, . 
decision, will, desire may be mentioned—not because :‘ 


they are necessarily more important, but because our | 


opponents usually treat them as more important. : 


Y 


The anšwer to this question: is forcible revolution ‘ 
possible? is: yes—when the will exists there is cer- ° 
tainly a way. And the will does exist, but not yet 
the leaders, the organizers of this will, the men and ; 


women able to express it fully in action. A 
Will is needed, and not mild scepticism, for such 
work. We can see signs of its existence, in vague, 
unshaped form, wherever the British peoples have 
not been ruined in body and spirit by capitalist 
decay: there is still an echo, in part of our chapter 
P 225 


1 r 


t 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


on the way wars end, of the words of Oliver Crom- 
well: ‘Vote it as you please. There is a company of 
poor men who will shed their last drop of blood 
before they see it settled so!’ 

The will, the intention to make a clean sweep of 
capitalism, grows under the pressure of hunger, of 
capitalist breakdown, but only as the understanding 
of the world grows, the understanding of necessity, 
of inevitable results from known causes. This under- 
standing does not grow mainly or most swiftly 
among those sections of the population who have the 
leisure and the money for books and study. It grows 
mainly among the workers. Just as the members of 
the working class have conditioned into them, by 
the basic facts and processes of their lives, the need 
to co-operate, to share, to act in masses (which is the 
subjective foundation for socialism) so in the work- 
ing class also there is conditioned, by all life as they 
meet it, a recognition of iron necessity, of inescapable 
results (which is the subjective foundation for the 
socialist revolution). It is the privilege of other 
classes to escape bare necessity, as reduced to its 
lowest denominator, hunger. Other classes, or 
rather the individuals in them, have the privileges 
of neurosis and hysteria: can escape brutal choice 
or ‘impossible’ environment by a ‘nervous break- 
down’ (a disease not recognized for panel patients). 
A member of the middle class, who will make a 
considerable fuss over a headache, cannot feel it 
possible that a chauffeur or charwoman ever has 
headaches. As for the mere factory worker—he is 
not thought of at all. It is therefore difficult for the 
226 


REVOLUTION 


middle class to realize with what stark certainty— 
from which no payment, or influence, or excuse is 
available to hide him—the difficult decisions of life, 
somewhat more insistent than headaches, press upon 
a worker. When it is clear to an industrial worker 
that the decision before him is war or revolution, he 
will not hesitate to choose. He will not insist, against 
all the facts, that ‘there must be some other way.’ 

The decision to end capitalism brings with it 
other necessary decisions. One is that no possi- 
bility can exist for even partial, or qualified, support 
for any form of capitalist war. The worker who 
takes this decision (or the individual from another 
class ready and able to become part of the working- 
class movement) will not agree with the Labour 
Party spokesman* who said he ‘could conceive of 
circumstances when it would be to the interests 
of British trade unionism willingly to help our 
country in the case of war.’ 

A further necessary decision is, obviously, to 
become a member of a political party representing 
his class and organized to carry through the mobili- 
zation of that class, with all allies it can gain, for 
revolution. The need for this is a great deal easier 
to see now that it is clear the ruling class will not 
hesitate to use the utmost brutality, Fascist terrorism, 
to forestall any attempt at peaceful transition to 
Socialism. 

But when the understanding has spread among, 
and the decision been taken by a sufficient number 
of workers, is there then in fact, the physical possi- 

* Mr. John Bromley. 

227 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


bility of successful revolution? Yes, every develop- 
ment of imperialist military technique makes it 
clearer that it is possible, in a revolutionary crisis, for 
the workers to take power. 

Such a crisis is produced by the refusal of the 
working class ‘to live in the old way,’ to adapt itself, 
shear off portions of its life, for the needs of declining 
capitalism. It brings with it an inability of the ruling 
class ‘to rule in the old way’; they must attempt 
some mixture of sham revolution and open, forcible 
repression, a mixture now plain for all to see in 
Fascism. In such a crisis the question is: Will the 
workers fight or surrender? If they are led by 
pacifists they will surrender, since a working class 
must necessarily group its forces round, and express 
them through, leaders. 

But even if the workers fight, could not aeroplanes 
‘bomb their forces out of existence in ten minutes’? 
We can put this question another way: could the 
Bolsheviks have seized power and held it for any 
length of time if modern weapons had been in the 
hands of their principal opponents, led by Kerensky 
or General Korniloff? 

Our answer is: yes—because these weapons are 
never actually in the hands of the imperialists ; they 
are always, in action, controlled by members of the 
working class and the petty-bourgeoisie. 

Members of the working class and of the petty- 
bourgeoisie are, in a revolutionary crisis, on both 
sides of the barricades. On which side would be the 
bulk of those who control the modern machinery of 
high speed warfare ? : 

228 


REVOLUTION 


Contrast the most effective fighting forces on either 
side in 1917. The sailors (necessarily the most 
advanced technically of all the Russian rank and 
file, since a battleship is a complicated machine) 
were the leaders of the Bolshevik armed insurrection. 
With them were the Putilov (and other) factory 
workers, the most technically competent in Russia, 
and some machine-gun and armoured-car units. 
On the other side Korniloff relied on a ‘Savage 
Division’ of cavalry, and Kerensky’ on ‘Junkers’ 
(officer cadets) and cossack troops. The contrast is 
striking ! | 

Even the most insistent pacifist can scarcely argue, 
after Kronstadt, Kiel, and Invergordon, that the 
Navy is sure to act against a revolutionary govern- 
ment in Britain. In all navies the conditions of ser- 
vice are such as to breed vigorous opponents of the . 
capitalist class—trained to a general level of intelli- 
gence and initiative in technical matters that is 
remarkably high. Therefore in considering the 
Russian Revolution and civil war, and the future 
British revolution, we can take the Navy as providing 
more arguments for the. Marxist view than for that 
of the pacifists. And the Navy means also the food 
supply in Britain. As Mr. Ramsay MacDonald 
gracefully says: ‘the Navy is us.’ 

There remain the questions of the Army and the 
Air Force. What are the effects of the development 
of modern military technique on the Army? Its fire- 
power has greatly increased—at the cost of depend- 
ence on accurate machinery and skilled repair for 
its principal weapon (the machine-gun), and de- 

229 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


pendence on the whole of heavy industry for its 
munitions. 

Its mobility has increased—at the cost of depend- 
ence on petrol, a commodity hard to guard effect- 
ively. (Its mobility, however, 1s little, if any, higher 
than that of revolutionary forces controlling the bulk 
of the civilian means of transport.) 

It possesses armoured vehicles capable of advan- 
cing against fire, and surmounting barricades (which 
is not the same thing as destroying barricades). 
These vehicles need considerable skill in handling 
and repair, depend on petrol, are somewhat ‘blind’ 
(particularly among houses) and can do little against 
snipers in a town. 

It possesses a new weapon, poison gas, the use of 
which against an insurrection would rouse into 
action every section of the population. With this 
weapon it is impossible even to pretend to differen- 
tiate between the revolutionaries and the rest of the 
population. The use of gas by a capitalist force, in a 
few working-class streets, would be the most rapid 
way of disintegrating such a force that could be 
devised by the stupidity of our great generals. 

Modern technique of warfare has also caused, 
within the Army, acute class differentiation, much 
technical specialization (i.e., dependence on irre- 
placeable ‘key’ men), close connection in personnel 
with the industrial working class, difficulties of 
arbitrary discipline, etc. 

All the above considerations apply to the Air Force 
as much asto the Army. But there are technical limi- 
tations of this weapon which may also be mentioned. 
230 


REVOLUTION 


In Ireland during the ‘Black and Tan’ fighting 
aircraft were found quite useless in dealing with 
snipers, with roof fighting, and all the other guer- 
rilla methods by which an insurrectionary advance 
guard would harry and hold up any attempt 
by a capitalist force to enter and control a revolu- 
tionary city. 

The modern high-speed aeroplanes would be of 
even less use in a city than the slower machines of 
war time, because the pilots would have less time to 
‘spot’ snipers, etc. 

Bombing is as indiscriminate as gas, and as local 
in its effects. An air force does not consist of a 
number of aeroplanes flying about with bombs on, 
ready to go into action at a moment’s notice. It is a 
complicated economic unit, of which the parts are 
so inter-dependent that the withdrawal of a number 
of individuals, and the unwillingness of another 
larger number to do their work properly (such as 
would occur in a revolutionary crisis when the bombs 
were falling on East-End Tories and Communists 
alike), would immediately cripple its ability to get 
machines into the air at all. 

The usual resources of a reactionary government 
In a crisis are students (university, ‘public’ school 
and hospital), cadets, and Fascist petty-bourgeois 
types. ‘Forces’ of this sort may possibly be of some 
fighting value under some conditions of warfare. 
That such ‘forces’ could handle tanks, aeroplanes, or 
even machine-guns successfully is an idea which 
could only occur to pacifists in a panic. 

The development of modern military technique is 

231 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


necessary to each capitalist Power in its efforts to 
outstrip its rivals. But look at these new weapons 
through the eyes of men who know how they are 
made and serviced and supplied and handled, and 
you will see that every advance in the technique of 
warfare is a new danger to capitalism. 

A revolution is possible. The weapons of capital- 
ism, that seem—and are—so terrible, need not 
frighten the class that they make powerful, because 
it makes them. But does this mean that revolu- 
tionaries desire, or that their policy is one of, ‘vio- 
lence’? Our answer to this question was made clear 
—so clear that no opponent of Communism has 
attempted to answer the argument—by R. Palme 
Dutt in 1925. He was writing six months before the 
‘General Strike, the first approach to a revolutionary 
crisis in modern Britain, and the General Strike 
justified every sentence. In the Labour Monthly, which 
he edits, Dutt wrote: 


‘It is a lie to say that the revolutionaries advocate 
violence and civil war. What the revolutionaries say 
is that the issue of bourgeois violence confronts the 
working class and has got to be faced, and that the 
workers cannot afford to put their trust in the 
capitalist law and the capitalist State machine for 
their protection. And events daily are proving the 
truth of this. 

‘Imagine a parallel. Suppose a scientist to declare, 
as a result of his investigations, that an earthquake 
will take place in England within ten years, and that 
all houses, unless reinforced in a certain way, will be 
shattered. It is reasonable to doubt his conclusion, 
232 


REVOLUTION 


to discuss his evidence, to examine the facts and see 
how far they bear him out. But the MacDonald 
method is different. Mr. MacDonald would say: 
Infamous scientist! He is in favour of earthquakes. 
He wants to shatter all our houses. Out with him! 
Earthquakes are all very well for countries like 
Japan: but we do not want them here. We like to 
live at peace. We have always lived at peace. 
Expel this scientist! Vote for me and no earth- 
quakes! And amid general applause, by an over- 
whelming majority, a resolution would be carried 
denouncing the scientist and denouncing all earth- 
quakes. 

‘Is the parallel monstrous? Yet this is precisely 
what happened at Liverpool (Labour Party Con- 
ference) with regard to Lenin’s prophecy of heavy 
civil war in England. For a civil war may happen, 
even though we do not wish it, if the bourgeoisie 
are determined upon it. 

‘Neither the Communists, nor any other section of 
the working-class movement, desire or advocate 
violence or civil war in any form. Communism 
stands for the abolition of every form of coercion and 
every form of violence. The abolition of violence and 
coercion is only possible under Gommunism : because 
Communism alone removes the conditions of human 
exploitation which inevitably give rise to, and can 
only exist by, daily violence and coercion. Com- 
pared with Communism, the Quaker opposition to 
violence is half-hearted and insincere: for the 
Quakers rest on capitalism and the capitalist appara- 
tus, draw their wealth from it, are mixed up with 
their financial investments and shares in the whole 
of imperialism and its daily violent subjection and 
coercion of the majority of the human race. Com- 


233 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


munism alone proceeds along the correct method to 
remove coercion by removing the causes of coercion. 
But this process involves struggle in the existing 
world of struggle: and Communism teaches that, so 
long as the working class submits to bourgeois 
violence, so long they not only do not escape struggle, 
but by the continuance and expansion of capitalism 
and imperialism the sum-total of violence in the 
world is increased. 

‘Lenin spoke of heavy civil war in England. But 
when that quotation is given, it is never given in full. 
Lenin did not say: “Let us make civil war in Eng- 
land.” Lenin did not say: “‘ Hurrah for civil war in 
England.” Indeed, on another occasion, Lenin 
declared, as Marx had declared before him, that if 
the revolution could be carried through peacefully 
in England, then speed the work. But what Lenin 
did say was that he was convinced that the revolution 
could not be carried through peacefully in England. 
And for this statement he gave sober matter-of-fact 
evidence and reasons, which have to be gainsaid 
before the conclusion can be gainsaid. What Lenin 
did say was that the English workers must “‘ prepare 
for’’—prepare for, not seek for, aim at, hope for— 
prepare for the necessity of winning their freedom, 
not through “easy parliamentary victories,” but 
through “‘heavy civil war.” That was a sober esti- 
mate of the future by the greatest working-class 
strategist in history. It was a scientific statement, 
backed by evidence, representing the outcome of his 
life’s work, study, thinking and experience of the 
working of social forces. .. . 

‘To-day the plain facts of the situation are already 
in the first stage of justifying Lenin’s words. Behind 
all the pacifism and democracy of his language, 


234 


REVOLUTION 


Baldwin in every speech is proclaiming his intention 
to use the full machine of power against the working 
class. At the same time as the parliamentary demo- 
crats are dreaming of a future moment when they 
will be able to use the machine of State on behalf of 
the working class, they are failing to see that at the 
present moment every support they are giving to the 
trickery of parliamentary democracy is strengthening 
the position of Baldwin against the working class. 
It is not for nothing that Baldwin stresses on every 
occasion his “democratic”? claim to represent ‘‘the 
majority”? (and every argument of the Labour 
leaders in favour of parliamentary democracy is a 
support of that claim)—and in the name of that 
claim his right and power to employ every weapon of 
coercion against “the minority,” i.e., the workers. 
The bourgeoisie are not so foolish as to lose their 
strategic advantage of representing the State as 
“the people.” It is their policy, while they are still 
possessed of that strategic advantage, to strike at the 
working-class movement so soon as it has become 
menacing to capitalist interests and is passing out of 
“safe” leadership. That is the whole meaning of the 
present period of the concentrated attack on the 
miners and the Communists, the organization of 
Fascism and the preparations for a great conflict. ... 

‘ What is the revolutionary answer to this situation? 
There is no “democratic” answer. What, then, does 
the revolutionary programme put forward at this 
stage of the working-class movement? Does the 
revolutionary programme say: “‘ Let us make a con- 
spiracy.”’ “Let us blow up Buckingham Palace.” 
“Let us abandon parliamentary and trade union 
action?” Nothing of the kind. The revolutionary 
programme says very simply: first, that the action of 


235 


THE COMING WORLD WAR 


the bourgeoisie against the workers, both legal, 
semi-legal and illegal, is to be expected at the present 
stage and is inevitable: second, that the working 
class cannot trust in the capitalist law and machine 
for their defence, but must trust in their own 
strength ; and third, that therefore the workers’ ranks 
must be united and organized to meet the capitalist 
attack. To realize this the workers need a common 
leadership and a common movement. The workers 
all over the country must be awakened to the 
struggle in front and to the issues to be faced. . . . 

‘The urgent need is the consolidation of a leader- 
ship . . . the consolidation of a Left Wing which will 
combine every honest element in the movement on a 
common programme of workers’ unity and defence 
against the capitalist attack.’ 


Our aim, if we really want to end capitalism and 
war, must be to establish such a unity and such a 
leadership—a fighting alliance of millions of people 
against the governments and forces of the capitalists. 
We must defeat, by whatever forms of mass action 
are most effective, the continual efforts of those 
forces to degrade and dragoon still further the living 
bodies and minds of the people of this country and 
of the Empire. When capitalism has been checked 
and split by the blows of such an alliance, can find 
no way out, cannot ‘rule in the old way,’ it will be 
possible for this united front to turn to the attack, to 
begin the great change. But we must work far more 
swiftly towards this than we are doing, if we are to 
succeed before the second World War breaks out. 


236 


APPENDIX 


ON A CAMPAIGN IN MANCHURIA AND SIBERIA 


APPENDIX 


The probability has already been mentioned 
that the first phase of the next World War will 
consist of, or include, a campaign in Manchuria, 
Mongolia, and Siberia. It may therefore be useful 
to outline the strategical problems involved here. 
We begin with a survey of the fronts. (See maps, 
pages 256-7.) 

Trans-Batkalia and Mongolia. This is difficult cam- 
paigning country, being almost all roadless uplands 
or desert. But it is not much worse than the Chinese 
province of Jehol which the Japanese overran in 
March 1933. The frontier over which operations 
may take place is here about 500 miles long. Only 
two roads of importance cross it: the motor road 
from Kalgan to Chita, and the caravan track north 
from Ulan-Bator, the capital of the Mongolian 
Peoples’ Republic. These 500 miles of frontier are on 
the average only 150 miles away from the trans- 
Siberian railway. At two points the railway is 
within 100 miles of the frontier. 

River Argun Front. This is the main battlefield near 
Manchuli on each side of the main railway. It is a 
front of about 350 miles. The railway crosses it at 
an angle to the front so that on each side the principal 
towns, Chita and Khailar, which will be the bases of 
the opposing forces, are closer to the front than would 
be the case if the railway went across at right angles. 

It is natural to expect, since the Japanese already 
occupy much of Inner Mongolia, that they will 
move a detachment through Outer Mongolia to the 
west of the main battle front ; the nature of the ground 
suggests that if there is to be a Soviet advance it will 

239 


APPENDIX 


take place on the other flank, on the Japanese right, 
north-east of the railway. Here the frontier is close 
to the Great Khingan range of mountains. This is 
the furthest part of Manchuria from the centres of 
Japanese power, and local ‘red’ forces, known to the 
Japanese as bandits, seem to be in effective occupa- 
tion of more of this ground than are the Japanese. 

Such a flanking movement, threatening the 
Japanese base at Khailar, and the communications 
between their front and Japan, would have to travel 
light as there are few roads, if any, in this mountain 
country. It could probably only be undertaken by 
a cavalry force. 

The Amur frontier. Where the river Argun runs 
into the river Amur is the most northerly point in 
Manchuria. The Amur frontier is the northern and 
north-eastern border of Manchuria and is 800 miles 
in length—twice the Western Front of 1918. 

The campaigning ground here, in its central and 
eastern part, is relatively open country. In dry 
weather it is suitable for motor transport through 
almost all its extent. The Japanese began in 1932 to 
build railways northwards from the main line, one of 
which reaches the Amur frontier roughly in the 
centre of its 800 miles. 

Japanese detachments moving along this line from 
the main railway, by Mergen and Sahalian, will be, 
at the beginning of the war, only separated from the 
Soviet town of Blagoveschensk by the width of the 
river. If such detachments can pass across the river 
here or on either flank, they will be within artillery 
range of the branch railway which is the Soviet line 
240 


APPENDIX 


of communications with Vladivostock. This railway 
runs right round Manchuria roughly in a semi-circle, 
keeping fifty miles or less away from the river frontier. 

The area around Vladivostock, at the eastern end 
of the Manchurian border, forms the second main 
front of the coming war. 

This is in sum a frontier two thousand miles ines 
five times as long as the Western Front during the 
first World War. It is physically impossible for 
either combatant to mass along this frontier, in the 
first months of the war, more than about one-fifth of 
the number of troops deployed on either side of the 
Western Front. 

It is impossible for these reasons, and because of 
the development of tanks, lorries and aeroplanes, for 
this war to develop into a trench deadlock similar to 
that in France between October 1914 and March 
1918. Such a deadlock, and the familiar methods of 
trench warfare, could only develop on the main 
fronts mentioned. Even there it is likely that modern 
military tendencies will modify this form of warfare 
almost out of all recognition. 

It is now necessary to discuss the strategy and the 
forces employed, and the effect of modern technique 
on the war. 

To deal with the probable strategic problems, we 
will take the main Manchuli or River Argun front 
first. The frontier on each side of the railway at 
Manchuli, and particularly to the north-east, is 
known to have been strongly fortified on the Soviet 
side. The railways behind the Japanese lines here 
are said to be better than those behind the Soviet 


Q 241 


APPENDIX 


lines. But these railways, 800 to 1,000 miles long, 
can scarcely be expected to carry to Khailar, the 
Japanese base, the vast supplies needed for an 
artillery barrage on the 1917-18 scale. One battle 
of three months’ duration, on the Western Front at 
the end of 1917, required 465,000 tons of shells for 
the British Army alone. That is thousands of full 
train-loads. ‘And the Japanese may at first need the 
major part of their heavy artillery a thousand miles 
and more away, outside Vladivostock. 

The Japanese are not likely to be such fools as to 
attack strongly entrenched positions, defended by 
machine-guns, without powerful artillery support. 
They know the limitations of their tanks against 
trenches, from their experiences between Chapei 
and the Woosung forts near Shanghai. But the area 
in Manchuria is so vast and the flanks so open that 
the Japanese may hope to stretch the Soviet forces 
to breaking-point. 

They will certainly try to make the railway behind 
the Russians unusable by air bombing (a difficult 
thing: it is easy to hamper a railway severely, hard 
to kill it). As already indicated, a detachment is 
likely to move through Mongolia and—with 500 
miles of front to choose from—will try to cut the 
railway. Except at harvest-time, and soon after, a 
large detachment would find it difficult to exist here. 
Whatever its size, it can scarcely escape air observa- 
tion. But if it is lucky in its ‘hide-and-seek’ it may 
possibly get well over the Mongolian—Siberian 
frontier. The chances against its getting to the 
railway and staying there are enormous: it is far 
242 


APPENDIX 


more likely that it will be held up between the 
frontier and the railway, and will then have to run 
for safety, since larger forces can be concentrated all 
round it. But if news does suddenly reach us, in the 
evening papers of next September or next May, of a 
Japanese column nearing the railway close to Chita 
or Verkhne-Udinsk, those who ring the church bells 
will be premature. National prayers of thanksgiving 
should be postponed for more solid achievements. 

A mechanized raiding force, of the sort probable 
on this flank, depends on continuous supplies. The 
only bases for supplies in or near Inner Mongolia 
are the rail-heads at Solun and Paiyintala in Man- 
churia, Dolon-Nor in Jehol Province and Suiyan 
(Sui-Yen-Ting or Kuku Khoto), in the Shansi 
Province of China on the Mongolian border. There 
is a railway from Suiyan through Peiping (Pekin) to 
Tsientsin. The use of this railway for supplies would 
be useful to the Japanese. The Chinese Government 
of Nanking (unless temporarily sold to a higher 
bidder) will not seriously attempt to stop Japan using 
this route. (But the Chinese working class will 
attempt to do so.) Japanese troops are already in 
control of this railway for some fifty miles between 
Kalgan and Suiyan. The first clash between the 
U.S.A. and Japan, arising directly out of a Japanese 
war on the Soviet Union, may come in this area if 
the Japanese need this route for supplies and use it, 
disregarding American protests. 

The Soviet resistance to invasion from Mongolia 
is likely to take three forms: cavalry on or over the 
Mongolian frontier, an armed population in the 

2Q 243 


APPENDIX 


Trans-Baikal province, and detachments of machine- 
gunners and other arms working from the railway 
line. 

The Soviet cavalry is strong in number and well 
equipped with machine-guns. Its peculiar feature, 
as compared with the cavalry of other nations, is that 
it is trained as the principal arm which works with 
tanks. Other cavalries have mechanized artillery 
and supply services, and are brigaded with armoured 
cars and tanks to some extent. But in the Red Army 
mounted machine-gunners and tanks comprise the 
main hitting power of one or more separate cavalry 
corps (three cavalry divisions form a corps). Whether 
the ground on the Mongolian frontier and in the | 
Khingan mountains is passable for tanks except in 
favourable climatic conditions, is doubtful. If it is, 
the Red cavalry divisions will be very formidable 
forces on the flanks of the main River Argun (Man- 
chuli) front. 

On the Amur River front the ground is certainly 
suitable for tanks working with cavalry. It can be 
crossed at a high speed by wheeled motors.* 

On the whole of the Amur front the Japanese will 
start the war with an easy objective in front of them: 
the railway. It is unlikely that, working from 
Mongolia into the Trans-Baikal, they can reach the 
railway; on the Amur front they certainly can. But 
here again the success is likely to be impermanent. 
With 800 miles of border to choose from, the Japanese 
can start from an unexpected spot. But their com- 
munications will be difficult and the Soviet railway 

* Cf. Colonel Sutton’s book, One-Arm Sutton. 

244 


APPENDIX 


on either side of their advance will be used to con- 
centrate troops against them. 

The Japanese dream of an empire up to Lake 
Baikal, and their desire for an early ‘showy’ success, 
may lead them into unwisdom; if they overweight 
their ‘side-shows’ hundreds of miles from secure 
communications or try to ‘butt through’ the Argun 
trenches early in the war, they are asking for severe 
trouble. The Red Army has plenty of recent experi- 
ence of fighting at various seasons in country far 
worse than Mongolia or the Amur. Its operations 
against ‘White’ bandits in the Yakut Autonomous 
Republic (northern Siberian forests) only ended in 
1928 and were carried on in anything up to fifty 
degrees of frost. 

The trouble about the Vladivostock front, from 
the Japanese point of view, is that it seems likely to 
be a slow business. The frontier lies 40 to 100 miles 
from Vladivostock. Down the coast, only 150 miles 
away, Close to the frontier, the Japanese have built a 
port, Seishin or Seishun, capable of handling a big 
army’s supplies. They have built railways running 
inland from this port. There is only one low moun- 
tain range (2,000 feet or so), passable in many 
places, between them and the River Sui-Fun and 
Amur Bay, on the far side of which is Vladivostock. 
The Japanese have the shipping lying idle to con- 
centrate five divisions against Vladivostock within 
the first month of war. (In 1904 it took them 34 
months to get five divisions into the war area, the 
Kuan-Tung peninsula.) They can at the same time 
move ‘Manchukuo troops’ (Chinese conscripts) to 


245 


APPENDIX 


the front by rail direct from Kirin and from Harbin. 
And then? Then they must try to take several 
‘Hindenburg lines’ in succession. 

The Red Army will not expect to defend for long 
the last five or ten miles of the present frontier 
towards the sea, where its positions could be shelled 
in reverse by Japanese battleships. If the front is 
straightened here so as to reach the sea at right- 
angles north of Gamoy point, it will consist of 120 
miles of entrenchments, from the sea to Lake 
Maiyan, which have been reinforced with concrete, 
and have had consistent attention for three years 
from a considerable number of the troops that will 
occupy them. These entrenchments form a ‘battle 
zone’ averaging thirty miles in depth. If the 
Japanese have discovered some new weapon, or 
developed tanks and artillery to a level not sus- 
pected and not shown in the Shanghai fighting, they 
can hope to work fairly rapidly through this defen- 
sive zone. If not, they can pile Passchendaele on the 
Somme, yet only progress at the rate of two miles a 
month—if that. 

They can more easily break over the frontier 
beyond Lake Maiyan, between Khabarovsk and 
Vladivostock, and seize the railway. Either in this 
way, or by landing a force on the rather difficult 
coast north-east of Vladivostock, they may be able 
to surround the city. They would then try to starve 
it out, as they did Port Arthur in 1904. 

- But in 1904 they needed only two divisions to 
contain the Russian troops in Port Arthur. They 
would need a far stronger force to form a wide ring 


246 


APPENDIX 


round Vladivostock, and would find the country 
north of that city very difficult. We have no means 
of knowing what Soviet forces are allocated to this 
part of the front, but they are not likely to be less 
than two divisions. These, with the assistance of an 
armed population (say, 25,000 rifles) could hold up 
an armv of four times their strength, on lines twenty 
to thirty miles away from the city, for a considerable 
period, perhaps for as long as supplies lasted. (It is 
probable that the factor limiting the Soviet force 
here is the question of storing sufficient supplies for 
it, and ammunition, with due regard to enemy air 
action. A cold storage depot capable of storing 
12,500 tons of meat has recently been erected in 
Vladivostock.) 

The Japanese would find an attempt to rush the 
entrenched frontier even more costly than their 
failure to storm Port Arthur in the spring of 1904. 

The Japanese dilemma, put shortly, is this: 


(a) Rush Vladivostock—casualties and failure. 

(b) Mask Vladivostock and concentrate elsewhere 
—this leaves behind them a fortified aerodrome 450 
miles from the Japanese home ports and factories, 
150 miles from important Korean ports (Seishun, 
etc.) on their direct route to Manchuria; a centre 
for submarines; a centre for cavalry or light tank 
raids at the communications of Japanese forces in the 
north. 

(c) Invest Vladivostock in force. That means a lot 
of troops, some of them sunk deep in roadless forests, 
facing towards the city. And also another, perhaps 

247 


APPENDIX 


larger,. covering force, strung out along the lower 
Amur, to keep Soviet cavalry from raiding these 
investing divisions. 


A difficult dilemma. And made worse by the 
development of a factor not mentioned yet: the air 
forces. 

Before the war from the air is discussed we must 
look at the numbers and equipment of the opposing 
forces. 

General Hayashi, then the Japanese Minister for 
War, stated in January 1934, that the Red Army 
had five divisions (100,000 men) on the Manchurian 
frontier. Other Japanese estimates have been seven 
and eight divisions. These forces have recently been 
strengthened considerably and could be increased 
in the first month of the war by the addition of 
a cavalry corps and several infantry divisions, 
moving from central Siberia (the capacity of 
the railway being one limiting factor in the move- 
ment, the international situation in the West being 
another). Indications received by the Soviet com- 
mand of their opponents’ disposition and intentions, 
interruption of the railway by air bombing, and 
many other influences will affect the Soviet troop 
movements. The total Soviet strength (after rein- 
forcement both by formed divisions and by the 
mobilization of the population, who are trained in 
the use of rifles) cannot much exceed, and may be 
less than, one hundred and fifty men per mile of the 
total front. 

During the first World War the concentration of 
248 


APPENDIX 


troops averaged about 4,000 per mile on the Western 
Front and was nowhere much ‘thinner’ than 2,000 
per mile. In the Russo-Japanese war the concentra- 
tion averaged over 2,000 men per mile of occupied 
frontage (both armies had ‘open’ flanks). Mechani- 
zation and the development of the machine-gun may 
make it possible for modern armies to stretch their 
deployment as widely as 500 men per mile; but 
neither army is likely to enter the war in such 
extended formation. One thousand men per mile 
(not of course in the front line, but including the 
forces in reserve and along railways) is likely to be 
the ‘thinnest’ concentration. On the main fronts 
the figure is likely to be between 2,000 and 5,000 
men per mile, at first. 

The point of these figures is that the Soviet forces, 
even if doubled by reinforcements, cannot be spread 
thinly over the whole 2,000 miles of frontier. They 
can occupy in strength only about one-fifteenth 
part of the frontier! 

It is inevitable that there should be two main 
groupings, one near Manchuli and one covering 
Vladivostock. It is also inevitable that the forces at 
such points as Blagovyeshchensk (half-way between 
these two concentrations) should be weak in relation 
to the forces that the Japanese—if they can risk 
sparing them—can concentrate against these fron- 
tiers. That is why Japanese ‘successes’ at points of 
minor importance are certain. 

The Japanese forces in Manchuria in 1932 and 
most of 1933 consisted of three divisions and three 
independent brigades, with a very small proportion 

249 


APPENDIX 


of cavalry—say 65,000 men in all. The Manchukuo 
conscripts were about 110,000 men. General 
Bluecher, commanding the Red Army in the Far 
East, has estimated the Japanese infantry in 1934 at 
130,000 men. 

The Japanese are in a position to increase these 
forces further before the outbreak of war, and can 
land four to five divisions during the first four or five 
weeks of war. If their main concentration is to be 
against Vladivostock, their troops can be concen- 
trated for action almost at once. 

At the battle of Mukden in the autumn of 1904 
the Japanese had 300,000 infantry available. That 
was the climax of their effort, and double the strength 
with which they had effected their first strategical 
concentration at Liao-Yang. They are likely to 
start this war with a larger army than that which 
ended the war of 1904: say 200,000 Japanese, and 
175,000 Chinese conscripts and levies. Their field 
army is likely to be larger than the Soviet forces, but 
the quality of the Chinese troops (fighting for a 
puppet Manchu ‘emperor’) will be worse than 
doubtful. 

The Japanese problem is: can they ‘mount’ two 
full-scale offensives—one on each main front? If 
they cannot, which should they postpone? 

It may be thought that they can deal first with 
Vladivostock, then proceed to transfer the bulk of 
their artillery and their best troops to the Manchuli 
front. But this would allow the Red Army at Man- 
chuli and along the River Argun the initiative for 
some months. If this is done, the Japanese cannot 
250 


APPENDIX 


hope to hold the northern group of the Greater 
Khingan mountains, and if Soviet cavalry pene- 
trates along and into these mountains it will then be 
impossible for the Japanese to mount an offensive at 
or near Manchuli, since the railway from Khailar 
eastwards towards the ports will be in danger. The 
loss of these mountains (described by a Soviet 
writer, O. Dashinsky, as ‘the most important strategic 
position in Manchuria’) would also threaten any 
subsidiary Japanese action on the Amur frontier. 

The Japanese Army chiefs have been developing 
the theory of ‘a sudden attack.’ At a conference 
called under the auspices of the magazine Hinode 
in August 1932, the Japanese Minister for Foreign 
Affairs summarized his position by saying that ‘a 
sudden attack is always accompanied by success 
even in a war on land.’ Captain Taketomi suggested 
that the air weapon should be made the main 
factor in this ‘sudden attack.’ Captain Katokam 
said that in a war with the Soviet Union, Vladivos- 
tock must be destroyed or occupied ‘before anything 
else.’ 

The words that we have italicized are an interest- 
ing reminder of 1904—a war that Japan began by 
a ‘sudden attack’ which destroyed several Tsarist 
warships before the crews of these vessels knew that 
war had begun. These tactics, according to current 
Japanese military opinion, can be equally effective 
in the air and on land—‘even on land.’ 

This theory rests, however, on the assumption that 
the victims of the ‘sudden attack’ are not prepared 
for it. A spokesman of the Soviets, Kaganovitch, 

251 


APPENDIX 


replied to this theory on January 21, 1934, by 
stating that ‘we are not a government of Tsarist 
fools, such as that of 1904.’ He referred pointedly to 
Port Arthur in 1904 and Vladivostock to-day. 

Hirota’s theory of a sudden attack ‘even on land’ 
presents its own problems. An attack on the trench 
lines near Vladivostock would seem suicidal. For 
any other attack on that city they must land on 
narrow beaches up the coast to the north. 

In 1904 the Japanese effected two such landings, 
at Pi-Tzu-Wo and at Takushan. The former, near 
Port Arthur, was a landing of three divisions and an 
artillery brigade. It was unopposed. It took eight 
days, from May 5, 1904. Disembarkation was carried 
on day and night. ‘Yet with all this, Oku’s army 
had to fight at Nan Shan, thirteen days after his 
divisions were landed, with an incomplete ammuni- 
tion supply.’* 

A ‘sudden attack’ carried out on lines such as 
these would not get very far, even if speeded up 
considerably. If on the other hand the air forces 
are relied upon for ‘a sudden attack,’ the fact 
that these forces cannot quickly destroy the re- 
sistance of entrenched troops must be remembered. 
And the even more important fact that the Soviet 
air force is larger and better equipped than the 
Japanese. | 

Here is a key-point in the ‘grand strategy’ of the 
Soviet Union. It is impossible to fight a great war, 
with armies on the 1916 scale, at the far end of 

* Major-General E. A. Altham, The Principles of War, London, 


1914. 
252 


APPENDIX 


3,000 miles of railway. It would be strategically 
suicidal for the Soviet Union to keep in the Far East 
portions of its army that may be needed in the West, 
against a German-Polish invasion. But it is made 
possible for them, by the development of the aero- 
plane, to keep in eastern Siberia a striking force more 
powerful than that of the Japanese. While this force 
needs supplies, they are not of such a weight or bulk 
as to overload the railway. And portions of this 
force could be brought, in an emergency, to a 
western front in three days. A division of troops 
moved by rail, under war conditions, might need 
three weeks or more. 

The new form of warfare, therefore, will enable 
the Soviet Union to do what has never previously 
been done: maintain at the end of 3,000 miles of 
railway a force capable of opposing effectively a 
modern ‘nation at war.’ And while the Soviet 
airmen will undoubtedly bomb—and scatter leaflets 
over—Japanese factories and ports (since they must. 
use all available weapons to defend the only socialist 
country in the world) they are likely to concentrate 
on making the lives of the Japanese armies unen- 
durable by day and night bombing over the whole 
area of Manchuria. The vast length of frontier will 
make it impossible to place fighting squadrons to 
intercept them. This form of warfare may not do 
very serious physical damage to the Japanese forces, 
or their railways and bases. But it will, almost 
certainly, within a few months, bring these forces 
either to breakdown or to revolt. No courage can 
endure the constant threat of war from the air, the 

253 


APPENDIX 


sleepless nights, the feeling of desperate helplessness 
during an attack that cannot be answered. 

While this is likely to be the main and over-ruling 
process at work behind the scenes, or rather from 
above them, in the whole war, there will at the same 
time be going on a struggle, the effects of which 
cannot be so clearly summed up, between the armies. 

The modern technique of land warfare, as applied 
to the Manchurian front, will probably lead to a 
mixture of trench and open warfare, raids by 
mechanized forces (or cavalry forces of which the 
main hitting power is the tank) occurring on each 
side of battle-zones which will not consist of trench 
lines such as those of 1915-17, but will be deep 
defensive lines held mainly by concrete strong- 
points full of machine-guns. Because of distances, 
railway difficulties, and the danger of tank raids 
getting through to the batteries, it is probable that 
artillery will play a relatively smaller part in battle 
than was the case in the first World War. 

There may be only one relatively fixed front, that 
near Vladivostock, or there may be several. On such 
fronts artillery, protected by anti-tank guns on the 
ground and fighting squadrons in the air, will have 
much to do. But where the flanks are fluid, where 
mechanized forces can be moved to a flank or into 
enemy territory at the rate of a hundred miles a day 
or so, artillery will always be in danger of being 
‘rushed.’ The war, apart from the influence of the 
air forces, will therefore largely depend on the 
efficiency and mobility of infantry armed with 
machine-guns. 

254 


APPENDIX 


Captain Liddell Hart, in his British Way in War- 
fare, has stated that the Soviet infantry have a 
greater number of machine-guns per battalion than 
any other army. With the first Five-Year Plan, 
the Soviet command claim, their forces were so far 
mechanized that seven horse-power in mechanical 
form was available for every Red Army man. That 
is an even higher power-man factor than in the 
British Army. But the real strength of the Soviet 
forces will depend, of course, on: their success in 
building a new type of man who knows what he is 
fighting for. And the power of the Soviet air squad- 
rons will partly be that they can drop pamphlets 
more destructive than most bombs. 

How soon, and to what extent this propaganda 
and the normal effects of war will tell on the stability 
of the Japanese empire, we cannot estimate. But 
here, as in any other aspect of the coming World 
War that may be studied, a revolutionary outcome 
seems more probable than any other. 


255 


U MANCHURIA 
] 


a BE RIA Principal} eee 
aaRS | Site" 
» Reinova Reilnayat ae: : 


fey QBuchaiu 


sitsihar 
d Anganchi @: 
RS HAR BIN 


ee ee 
Trektsine AEST) 
CHINA—a~pr 


Oo 109 200 


NoTeE: It is probable that railways shown as “proposed” on | 
this map have now been completed, and others are built or : 


building. (See p. 96.) 


256 


il 


EERTE 
P A OE cect 
TERI wee ee Ne 
= = . ws -m 


f f = ~ -e me mS i_—< 
a fins h o Se 
ir: 3 \Verkhoyansk ' =“ 
\ oy | ——— 
z ( i E 
E YA pa AUT RER wo Ta 
ph w S AER EEY 
BA i aun {Se - E R= 
8: e 
S: Okhotsk ae oo 

KAMCHATKA 
BERIA, AEBS a EEE 
| SS 
t e E 
e ——— ery 
% r aaa | SES 

AMY R 


> a 
JA; ý 
Q; 

? ce È 
L 

= 
L$) 
> 
x 
ma 
> 
= 
12 
‘el 


MONG Sake of. Troman ==> 
PEOPL =——— 
(Ovrer MONS: oe «MANCHU do SSA WE T 
peta ORE pd Changchu ZEN 


257 


—_ 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return to desk from which borrowed. 
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 


3 Seb’S0 
N PORTA 
Cpo t+ 1990 


LD 21-100m-—11,'49 (B7146s16)476 


m ta rnr 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 


i 
! 
| 


ertt trigg hits aS ro are MERE TES WSOP NIEI esate ever ine Pebses Soh ds thos ean etes caeates sact= ssee3 ~ersgreipsareecenrset perctectenst riestresssessesrisat ie sie 
R REA NET ER SLi s ARa ak intim irainetan nitear naiihi oS E E SR a ester ATEAN pepe pone ee bia Peacoat 


— ee ee -—— —— 
TTT ewe 
_ ~ - —-- -—_ —-—_ ———_ — e 
a a — 
— - - — =- - —